HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD...

256
RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated 1 HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual This entire document is the property of Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. (HPS) and may not be reproduced, transmitted, published or stored in an electronic retrieval system, in whole or in part, by any means electronic or otherwise. For permission, contact: [email protected] Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. RFL™ Products 353 Powerville Road ● Boonton Twp., NJ 07005-9151 USA Tel: 973.334.3100 ● Fax: 973.334.3863 Email: [email protected] www.rflelect.com Publication Number RF-MCDGARDPRO Version 004, Printed in U.S.A. March 30, 2018

Transcript of HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD...

Page 1: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

1

HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual

This entire document is the property of Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. (HPS) and may not be

reproduced, transmitted, published or stored in an electronic retrieval system, in whole or in part, by any means – electronic or otherwise. For permission, contact: [email protected]

Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products

353 Powerville Road Boonton Twp., NJ 07005-9151 USA Tel: 973.334.3100 Fax: 973.334.3863

Email: [email protected] www.rflelect.com

Publication Number RF-MCDGARDPRO Version 004, Printed in U.S.A.

March 30, 2018

Page 2: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

2

NOTICE

The information in this manual is proprietary and confidential to Hubbell® Power Systems, Inc. (HPS) – RFL

Products. Any reproduction or distribution of this manual, in whole or part, is expressly prohibited, unless written

permission is given by Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL Products.

This manual has been compiled and checked for accuracy; however, HPS makes no representation or warranty as

to the accuracy or completeness of the information in this manual. The information in this manual does not

constitute a warranty of performance. HPS/RFL brand products reserves the right to revise this manual and make

changes to its contents from time to time. We assume no liability for losses incurred as a result of out-of-date or

incorrect information contained in this manual.

HPS shall not have any liability resulting from the use of the information in this manual. This manual does not

purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, nor provide for every possible contingency to be met in

connection with installation, operation, or maintenance of this specific product. Should further information be

desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser's purposes, the

matter should be referred to your HPS/RFL product representative or HPS/RFL Customer Service Department at

[email protected], or by visiting the website at www.rflelect.com/Support.

NOTES

It is recommended that this product be opened immediately after receiving and inspected for proper operation and

signs of impact damage.

For information regarding product warranty and repairs, please visit the HPS/RFL website at

www.rflelect.com/Support or e-mail the HPS/RFL Customer Service Department at

[email protected]

Page 3: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

3

Table of Contents

Safety Instructions............................................................................................................... 1-1 Section 1.

1.1 Warnings and Safety Summary...................................................................................................... 1-1 1.2 External Labels, Warning and Cautions ......................................................................................... 1-4

System Description ............................................................................................................. 2-1 Section 2.

2.1 Key Features for the HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System ................................................................ 2-1 2.2 Supplied Drawings ......................................................................................................................... 2-2 2.3 The HPS/RFL GARD Pro System Modules with Available Options ............................................... 2-2 2.4 The HPS/RFL GARD Pro System Slot Location and Module Description ..................................... 2-3 2.5 Front Panel Indicators/Connections ............................................................................................... 2-9 2.6 Graphical User Interface (GUI)..................................................................................................... 2-10 2.7 Controller Redundancy ................................................................................................................. 2-11 2.8 TSD (Touch Screen Display)........................................................................................................ 2-15

Installation ............................................................................................................................ 3-1 Section 3.

3.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 3-1 3.2 Unpacking....................................................................................................................................... 3-1 3.3 Mounting ......................................................................................................................................... 3-2 3.4 Ventilation ....................................................................................................................................... 3-4 3.5 System Module I/O Connections .................................................................................................... 3-4 3.6 Rear I/O, Alarm Relay and Input Power Connections .................................................................... 3-9 3.7 System timing ............................................................................................................................... 3-13 3.8 Current Limiter Option .................................................................................................................. 3-19 3.9 The HPS/RFL GARD Pro System Boot-Up Sequence ................................................................ 3-20

System Configuration.......................................................................................................... 4-1 Section 4.

4.1 Connecting a Laptop and Setting IP Addresses ............................................................................ 4-1 4.2 Configuring a PC Using DHCP and Static IP ................................................................................. 4-2 4.3 First Time Login to the HPS/RFL GARD Pro System Web Server ................................................ 4-5 4.4 File Operations ............................................................................................................................. 4-11 4.5 Web/SCP Server .......................................................................................................................... 4-15 4.6 Inventory and Software Information ............................................................................................. 4-19 4.7 Dynamic Menu Feature ................................................................................................................ 4-20 4.8 Changing Settings – General Information .................................................................................... 4-21 4.9 Input/Output Module ..................................................................................................................... 4-21 4.10 Front Panel LED Status and Configuration ................................................................................ 4-36 4.11 System Alarms Status and Configuration .................................................................................. 4-38 4.12 SOE Status and Configuration ................................................................................................... 4-41 4.13 Logic Configuration .................................................................................................................... 4-47 4.14 System Settings ......................................................................................................................... 4-50 4.15 Advanced Settings ..................................................................................................................... 4-52 4.16 DNP3 .......................................................................................................................................... 4-59 4.17 SNMP ......................................................................................................................................... 4-78

Power Line Carrier ............................................................................................................... 5-1 Section 5.

5.1 Power Line Carrier Function........................................................................................................... 5-1 5.2 Making Connections to the Rear Analog PLC Module ................................................................... 5-7

Page 4: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4

5.3 Carrier Level Indicator (CLI) Front Panel Meter ............................................................................. 5-9 5.4 PLC Module User Interface ............................................................................................................ 5-9 5.5 Power Line Carrier Commissioning .............................................................................................. 5-35 5.6 Configuring 50 and 100W applications with Optional 9508 RF Chassis ...................................... 5-49 5.7 Optional Switched Battery Power Supply ..................................................................................... 5-76 5.8 Installations with Two or More PLC Modules ............................................................................... 5-78

Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................... 6-1 Section 6.

6.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 6-1 6.2 Connectivity Issues ........................................................................................................................ 6-1 6.3 Module Level Alarms ...................................................................................................................... 6-3

Software Upgrade Utility ..................................................................................................... 7-1 Section 7.

7.1 System Firmware Upgrade Overview ............................................................................................ 7-1 7.2 The HPS/RFL GARD Pro system Upgrade Tool Installation ......................................................... 7-2 7.3 The HPS/RFL GARD Pro system Firmware Upgrade Procedure .................................................. 7-5

Technical Data/Specifications ............................................................................................ 8-1 Section 8.

8.1 System Specifications .................................................................................................................... 8-1 8.2 Optional Modules ........................................................................................................................... 8-4 8.3 DNP3 Device Profile Document ..................................................................................................... 8-6 8.4 Disposal .......................................................................................................................................... 8-8

Index ...................................................................................................................................... 9-1 Section 9.

9.1 Index ............................................................................................................................................... 9-1

Application Notes ............................................................................................................ 10-5 Section 10.

Page 5: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5

List of figures Figure 1-1. Location of Protective Earth Stud .......................................................................... 1-1 Figure 1-2. External Labels, Warnings and Cautions ............................................................... 1-4

Figure 2-1. The HPS/RFL GARD Pro System ......................................................................... 2-1 Figure 2-2. Supplied Drawings ................................................................................................. 2-2 Figure 2-3. Module Placement in the HPS/RFL GARD Pro System (3U) ............................... 2-3 Figure 2-4. Module Placement in the HPS/RFL GARD Pro System (6U) ............................... 2-4 Figure 2-5. Programmable LEDs .............................................................................................. 2-6

Figure 2-6. Base Input/Output Unit showing Plug-On Boards ................................................. 2-7 Figure 2-7. GPS Antenna .......................................................................................................... 2-8 Figure 2-8. HPS/RFL GARD Pro System Front Panel, Indicators/Connections ...................... 2-9 Figure 2-9. Graphical User Interface ...................................................................................... 2-10 Figure 2-10. Chassis Configuration Status web page for 6U Chassis with Redundancy ....... 2-14

Figure 2-11. Chassis Configuration Status web page for 6U Chassis with Unhealthy Inactive

Controller ................................................................................................................................. 2-14

Figure 2-12. Touch Screen Display in 3U Chassis. ................................................................ 2-15 Figure 2-13. Touch Screen Orientation .................................................................................. 2-16

Figure 2-14. Touch Screen Initialization. ............................................................................... 2-17 Figure 2-15. System Information ............................................................................................ 2-18

Figure 2-16. Events Log (SOE’s) ........................................................................................... 2-18 Figure 2-17. Push Button Menu .............................................................................................. 2-19 Figure 2-18. Test Menu........................................................................................................... 2-19

Figure 2-19. Inventory Menu .................................................................................................. 2-20 Figure 3-1. Mounting dimensions for the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system chassis ..................... 3-3

Figure 3-2. System Module I/O Connections ........................................................................... 3-5

Figure 3-3. RS-485 DNP3 connection ...................................................................................... 3-7

Figure 3-4. Network connections .............................................................................................. 3-8 Figure 3-5. Rear I/O Terminal Block Connections ................................................................... 3-9

Figure 3-6. Relay Connections/Power Supply I/O ................................................................. 3-10 Figure 3-7. Chassis Grounding Location ................................................................................ 3-11 Figure 3-8. HPS/RFL GARD Pro System – 3U Chassis, System I/O Board Jumper Locations

.................................................................................................................................................. 3-13 Figure 3-9. IRIG-B with GPS ................................................................................................. 3-15

Figure 3-10. RS-232 Pin-Outs ................................................................................................ 3-16 Figure 3-11. Removing System I/O Board (3U) ..................................................................... 3-16 Figure 3-12. Jumper Location for IRIG-B through Rear RS-232 Connector (3U) ................ 3-17 Figure 3-13. Removing System I/O Board (6U) ..................................................................... 3-17

Figure 3-14. Jumper Location for IRIG-B through Rear RS-232 Connector (6U) ................ 3-18 Figure 3-15. Current Limiter Terminal Block Connection ..................................................... 3-19 Figure 3-16. Location of LEDs on Controller Board .............................................................. 3-20

Figure 4-1. Front Ethernet Port ................................................................................................. 4-1 Figure 4-2. Internet Access Icon ............................................................................................... 4-2 Figure 4-3. Local Area Connection .......................................................................................... 4-2 Figure 4-4. Properties................................................................................................................ 4-3 Figure 4-5. Internet Protocol Version ....................................................................................... 4-3 Figure 4-6. Obtain an IP Address Automatically...................................................................... 4-4 Figure 4-7. Use the Following IP Address................................................................................ 4-4 Figure 4-8. First Time Login .................................................................................................... 4-5

Page 6: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

6

Figure 4-9. HPS/RFL GARD Pro System Dashboard .............................................................. 4-6

Figure 4-10. Access Levels ....................................................................................................... 4-8 Figure 4-11. Access Control ..................................................................................................... 4-9 Figure 4-12. Access Log ......................................................................................................... 4-10

Figure 4-13. Send File to HPS/RFL GARD Pro System ........................................................ 4-11 Figure 4-14. Save File to PC ................................................................................................... 4-13 Figure 4-15. Web/SCP Server................................................................................................. 4-15 Figure 4-16. Inventory and Version Control........................................................................... 4-19 Figure 4-17. Dynamic Menu Feature ...................................................................................... 4-20

Figure 4-18. Settings, General Information ............................................................................ 4-21 Figure 4-19. Removing Input/Output Module ........................................................................ 4-22 Figure 4-20. Setting Jumpers on the Input Unit ...................................................................... 4-23 Figure 4-21. Setting Switches on the Relay Output Unit........................................................ 4-24

Figure 4-22. I/O Status ............................................................................................................ 4-25 Figure 4-23. Configuring Inputs ............................................................................................. 4-26

Figure 4-24. Input Mapping .................................................................................................... 4-27 Figure 4-25. Inputs Advanced Configuration ......................................................................... 4-28

Figure 4-26. Input Test ........................................................................................................... 4-29 Figure 4-27. Output Configuration ......................................................................................... 4-31 Figure 4-28. Output Mapping ................................................................................................. 4-32

Figure 4-29. Output Advanced Configuration ........................................................................ 4-33 Figure 4-30. Output Test ......................................................................................................... 4-34

Figure 4-31. LED Status ......................................................................................................... 4-36 Figure 4-32. LED Configuration............................................................................................. 4-37 Figure 4-33. Alarm Status ....................................................................................................... 4-38

Figure 4-34. Alarm Configuration .......................................................................................... 4-40

Figure 4-35. Retrieving SOE Records .................................................................................... 4-41 Figure 4-36. SOE Triggers ...................................................................................................... 4-43 Figure 4-37. SOE Record Details (Logic Bits) ....................................................................... 4-44

Figure 4-38. SOE Record Details (Logic Table) .................................................................... 4-45 Figure 4-39. SOE Counters ..................................................................................................... 4-46

Figure 4-40. SOE Configuration ............................................................................................. 4-47 Figure 4-41. Logic Options ..................................................................................................... 4-48

Figure 4-42. Logic Configuration, Timers .............................................................................. 4-49 Figure 4-43. System Configuration, Ethernet Labels ............................................................. 4-50 Figure 4-44. System Configuration, Clock ............................................................................. 4-51 Figure 4-45. Advanced Settings, Logic Bits ........................................................................... 4-52 Figure 4-46. Advanced Settings, HMI Bits ............................................................................ 4-53

Figure 4-47. TSD Wake-Up Settings ...................................................................................... 4-55 Figure 4-48. TSD Push Button Interface Configuration. ........................................................ 4-56

Figure 4-49. TSD Push Button Interface. ............................................................................... 4-57 Figure 4-50. TSD Blank Button .............................................................................................. 4-58 Figure 5-1. Minimum Channel Spacing (FSK)......................................................................... 5-3 Figure 5-2. As Supplied Drawing ............................................................................................. 5-7 Figure 5-3. HPS/RFL GARD Pro system PLC Analog Module .............................................. 5-8 Figure 5-4. CLI Meter, Front Panel Mounting on a 3U Chassis ............................................... 5-9 Figure 5-5. FSK Status ............................................................................................................ 5-10 Figure 5-6. FSK Configuration ............................................................................................... 5-12

Page 7: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

7

Figure 5-7. FSK Configuration, Advanced ............................................................................. 5-14

Figure 5-8. Function Buttons .................................................................................................. 5-15 Figure 5-9. FSK Test............................................................................................................... 5-19 Figure 5-10. On/Off Status ..................................................................................................... 5-20

Figure 5-11. On/Off Configuration ......................................................................................... 5-22 Figure 5-12. On/Off Configuration, Advanced....................................................................... 5-24 Figure 5-13. On/Off Configuration, Checkback ..................................................................... 5-27 Figure 5-14. On/Off Configuration, Hard Carrier .................................................................. 5-30 Figure 5-15. On/Off Test ........................................................................................................ 5-33

Figure 5-16. Receiver Operating Range and Dynamic Range ................................................ 5-34 Figure 5-17. PLC Calibration ................................................................................................. 5-36 Figure 5-18. PLC Rear Module Adjustments ......................................................................... 5-38 Figure 5-19. PLC Verifying Jumpers J12 through J15 ........................................................... 5-40

Figure 5-20. PLC Verifying Jumpers J16 through J20 ........................................................... 5-41 Figure 5-21. PLC Verifying Jumpers J21 through J25 ........................................................... 5-42

Figure 5-22. PLC Jumper Settings, Transmit Carrier Frequency Range ................................ 5-43 Figure 5-23. PLC Analog Module, Carrier Level Indicator Modes - Jumpers ....................... 5-46

Figure 5-24. Location of Potentiometers on Digital PLC Module ......................................... 5-47 Figure 5-25. J6 Pin Numbers .................................................................................................. 5-48 Figure 5-26. 9508 RF Chassis Mounted on the HPS/RFL GARD Pro System ...................... 5-49

Figure 5-27. Front View of the 9508 RF Chassis Showing Module Locations in 50W System

.................................................................................................................................................. 5-51

Figure 5-28. 9508 RF Chassis Block Diagram ....................................................................... 5-52 Figure 5-29. 9508 RF Chassis Power Amplifier ..................................................................... 5-53 Figure 5-30. Additional 50W Module in 100W Systems ....................................................... 5-54

Figure 5-31. Location of 50W Power Amplifier Module ....................................................... 5-54

Figure 5-32. 50W Power Amp Circuit Board ......................................................................... 5-55 Figure 5-33. Power Amplifier, Power Supply ........................................................................ 5-57 Figure 5-34. Power Amplifier, Power Supply, Block Diagram .............................................. 5-58

Figure 5-35. TX Filter, Top View ........................................................................................... 5-58 Figure 5-36. Location of Jumpers on the TX Filter, PC Board 107828-2 .............................. 5-60

Figure 5-37. Location of Jumpers on the TX Filter, PC Board 107828-1 .............................. 5-62 Figure 5-38. Balance Board .................................................................................................... 5-63

Figure 5-39. Location of Jumpers on the Balance Board ....................................................... 5-64 Figure 5-40. Line Board .......................................................................................................... 5-65 Figure 5-41. RFL9508 Line Board, Block Diagram ............................................................... 5-65 Figure 5-42. Location of Jumpers on the Line board .............................................................. 5-67 Figure 5-43. Location of Jumpers on the RX Filter board ...................................................... 5-68

Figure 5-44. Location of Jumpers on the RX Filter board, Showing Jumper Groupings ....... 5-69 Figure 5-45. 9508 Attenuator Board ....................................................................................... 5-70

Figure 5-46. 9508 Mother Board, Rear View ......................................................................... 5-71 Figure 5-47. Rear Panel Wiring of a typical HPS/RFL GARD Pro system PLC with a 50W

9508 RF Chassis. ..................................................................................................................... 5-74 Figure 5-48. Rear Panel Wiring of a typical HPS/RFL GARD Pro system PLC with a 100W

9508 RF Chassis. ..................................................................................................................... 5-75 Figure 5-49. Optional Power Supply I/O Module, Single On/Off Switch.............................. 5-76 Figure 5-50. Switched Battery Output, Functional Diagram .................................................. 5-77 Figure 5-51. Making Connections to a Second PLC Module ................................................. 5-78

Page 8: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

8

Figure 5-52. Setting Jumpers on Second PLC Analog Module .............................................. 5-79

Figure 6-1. Connectivity Flow Chart ........................................................................................ 6-2 Figure 6-2. PLC Digital Board.................................................................................................. 6-5 Figure 6-3. PLC Analog Module Top View ............................................................................. 6-8

Figure 6-4. PLC Analog Module Rear Panel View .................................................................. 6-9 Figure 6-5. PLC Power Amp Section ....................................................................................... 6-9

Page 9: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

9

List of Tables Table 2-1 HPS/RFL GARD Pro System Module with Available Options ................................ 2-2 Table 2-2. Web Page, Controller Card, Status Color Codes ................................................... 2-13

Table 2-3 Button States and Actions ....................................................................................... 2-16 Table 3-1. Jumpers Required on System I/O Board when GPS Module is NOT INSTALLED

.................................................................................................................................................. 3-14 Table 3-2. System I/O jumper Settings with IRIG-B and GPS .............................................. 3-15 Table 4-1 Alarm States .............................................................................................................. 4-7

Table 4-2 Setting Access Levels ................................................................................................ 4-7 Table 4-3 Security Levels ........................................................................................................ 4-16 Table 4-4 LED Priorites ........................................................................................................... 4-37 Table 4-5. TSD Push Button Interface fields .......................................................................... 4-57 Table 4-6. HPS/RFL GARD Pro system list of DNP3 data points ......................................... 4-60

Table 4-7. General Configuration fields ................................................................................. 4-64 Table 4-8. DNP Type Configuration Field Descriptions ........................................................ 4-66

Table 4-9. DNP Status fields .................................................................................................. 4-72 Table 4-10. Field descriptions for DNP status ........................................................................ 4-73

Table 4-11. SNMP Configuration webpage fields .................................................................. 4-81 Table 4-12. SNMP trap MIB contents .................................................................................... 4-82

Table 5-1 2F Trip Transport Delay and Channel Spacing ......................................................... 5-2 Table 5-2 3F Trip Transport Delay and Channel Spacing ......................................................... 5-2 Table 5-3 On/Off Block Transport Delay and Channel Spacing ............................................... 5-5

Table 5-4. Compatibility Issues for PLC Module Software ..................................................... 5-5 Table 5-5 TB1 Terminal Assignments ....................................................................................... 5-8

Table 5-6 Transmitter State ..................................................................................................... 5-10

Table 5-7 Reciever State .......................................................................................................... 5-11

Table 5-8 Recommended FSK Settings ................................................................................... 5-16 Table 5-9 Recommended On/Off Settings ............................................................................... 5-25

Table 5-10 Recommended Checkback Settings, 2-Terminal Line Testing ............................. 5-28 Table 5-11 Recommended Checkback Settings, 3-Terminal Line Testing ............................. 5-29 Table 5-12 Recommended Hard Carrier Settings, 2-Terminal Line Testing ........................... 5-31

Table 5-13 Recommended Hard Carrier Settings, 3-Terminal Line Testing ........................... 5-32 Table 5-14. PLC Calibration ................................................................................................... 5-37

Table 5-15. PLC Analog Module Assembly Part Numbers (500935-X, New Board) ........... 5-44 Table 5-16. TX Filter Jumper settings (500935-X, New Board) ............................................ 5-44 Table 5-17. PLC Analog Module Assembly Part Numbers (500930-X, Old Board) ............. 5-45 Table 5-18. TX Filter Jumper settings (500930-X, Old Board) ............................................. 5-45

Table 5-19. Carrier Level Indicator loads ............................................................................... 5-47 Table 5-20. Modules Included in the 9508 RF Chassis .......................................................... 5-50 Table 5-21 Function of the Jumpers, Connectors and Potentiometers on the Power Amp Circuit

Board ........................................................................................................................................ 5-55 Table 5-22 Function of the DIP Switches SW1 and SW2 on the Power Amp Board ............. 5-56 Table 5-23 Power Amp, Power Supplies ................................................................................. 5-57 Table 5-24 TX Filter Setup Jumpers ........................................................................................ 5-61 Table 5-25 Setting Jumpers on the Balance Board .................................................................. 5-64 Table 5-26 Line Board, Setup Jumpers and Switch Settings ................................................... 5-67 Table 5-27 Motherboard Rear Panel Connector Assignments ................................................ 5-71 Table 5-28 Motherboard, TB1 Terminal Assignments ............................................................ 5-72

Page 10: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

10

Table 5-29 TB1 Connections on Second PLC Module ........................................................... 5-79

Table 6-1 PLC Digital Module, Module Level Alarms ............................................................. 6-3 Table 6-2 PLC Common PLC Troubleshooting Issues ............................................................. 6-4 Table 6-3 Settings for the PLC Digital Board ........................................................................... 6-6

Table 6-4 Settings for the PLC Analog Module ...................................................................... 6-10 Table 8-1 The HPS/RFL GARD Pro System Power Supply Specifications ............................. 8-3

Page 11: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

11

List of Effective Pages

When revisions are made to the HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual, the

entire section where revisions were made is replaced. For this addition of the Instruction

Manual dated February 16, 2018 the sections are dated as follows.

Section Date

Front Section, TOC etc. January 13, 2017

Section 1. January 13, 2017

Section 2. March 1, 2018

Section 3. March 1, 2018

Section 4. March 1, 2018

Section 5. March 1, 2018

Section 6. December 9, 2016

Section 7. March 1, 2018

Section 8. January 1, 2016

Section 9. March 1, 2018

Section 10. December 1, 2015

Trademark information:

RFL™ GARD Pro™ System is a trademark of Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.

“Windows” is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

“Ethernet” is a trademark of Xerox Corporation.

The trademark information listed above is, to the best of our knowledge, accurate and complete

Revision Record

Rev. Date on Manual

Description of Changes Actual Date Released

12/1/15 Initial Release under ECO 8000-572 12/1/2015

03/1/16 Added Emulator and Troubleshooting Sections 03/9/2016

12/16/16 Added TSD section, Upgrade tool and New controller with Redundancy

1/13/2017

04/05/17 Revised Hubbell and RFL Logos and Header/Footer contents.

04/10/2017

03/13/18 Updated DNP3 and SNMP Sections. Updated screen shots for the updated interface. Updated for System Firmware 2.2.0

03/30/2018

Page 12: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

12

Ordering Information, Decoding the Part Number Serial and part number information is located on the right mounting bracket (ear) of the

HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ system unit as shown below. The smart number and drawing

numbers are located on the other mounting bracket along with other customer information.

SO 170523

PO 02345210000

PN GARD3U476

SN 07420072

Sales order numberPurchase order number

Part numberSerial number

RH

LH

GARD5D0E100AA31

CD64144

00084_001_A

00084_001_A_CXX

Smart number see the

following page for

configurator Drawing number

Customer number

Part of software

number

Software revision

Configuration number, for

example different units

could have different

frequency settings

Page 13: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

13

The following pages list the possible ordering options:

Product Smart Number >> GPRO 3U

Front Panel Touch Screen Display

None 0

Yes TSD

Yes with Stylus Tether TSDT

Front Panel Test Switch

None 0

Standard TD

Primary Power Supply Voltage Input

24 VDC 24

48 VDC 48

125 VDC or 120 VAC 125

250 VDC 250

Redundant Power Supply Voltage Input

None 0

24 VDC 24

48 VDC 48

125 VDC or 120 VAC 125

250 VDC 250

Power Supply Interface

With Multiprotocol (RS-449, V.35, X.21) Digital I/O MP

With Double Pole Switched Battery Output DP

Front System Display Module

Without Digital Teleprotection Functionality No

Redundant Controller

No 0

System I/O Ethernet Port Type

Electrical E

Fiber Optic F

GPS for System Clock Synchronization

Yes G

No 0

Front Functional Modules (Select Eight with 6U and Two with 3U)

Power Line Carrier FSK or On/Off (50 Ohms) w/CLI Meter

Power Line Carrier FSK or On/Off (75 Ohms) w/CLI Meter

TX Only Power Line Carrier FSK (50 Ohms)

TX Only Power Line Carrier FSK (75 Ohms)

RX Only Power Line Carrier FSK (50/75 Ohms) w/CLI Meter

Power Line Carrier FSK or On/Off - No Hybrid (50 Ohms) w/CLI Meter

Power Line Carrier for External Power Amp

Empty

Rear I/O Terminal Block Type

Screw S

Commpression C

Rear I/O Modules (Select Ten with 6U and Four with 3U )

Occupied Slot Based On Front Module Selection

Empty

Discrete I/O Units

6 Inputs

6 Solid State Outputs

6 Relay Outputs

12 Inputs

12 Solid State Outputs

12 Relay Outputs

6 Solid State Outputs and 6 Relay Outputs

6 Solid State Outputs and 6 Inputs

6 Relay Outputs and 6 Inputs

Current Limiting Output

None 0

48 Vdc CL48

125 Vdc CL125

Effective: 3/16/17

SI

RI

RFL® GARD Pro™ 3U - Ordering Information

Consumes two rear slots in corresponding slot number

Consumes two rear slots in corresponding slot number

Consumes two rear slots in corresponding slot number

Consumes two rear slots in corresponding slot number

Consumes two rear slots in corresponding slot number

Consumes two rear slots in corresponding slot number

Consumes two rear slots in corresponding slot number

Rear Slots 1 through 4

/----------------------------Select 4 I/O----------------------------\

Fro

nt S

lot 4

RR

SR

Fro

nt S

lot 3

Re

ar S

lot 1

Re

ar S

lot 2

Re

ar S

lot 3

Re

ar S

lot 4

SS

IE

SE

RE

II

/-Select 2 Functions-\

Front Slots 4 - 3

X

0

P5 & 0 (uses two slots)

P7 & 0 (uses two slots)

T5 & 0 (uses two slots)

T7 & 0 (uses two slots)

PR & 0 (uses two slots)

PN & 0 (uses two slots)

PX & 0 (uses two slots)

0

Page 14: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

14

Product Smart Number >> GPRO 6U

Front Panel Touch Screen Display

None 0

Yes TSD

Yes with Stylus Tether TSDT

Front Panel Test Switch

None 0

Standard TD

Primary Power Supply Voltage Input

24 VDC 24

48 VDC 48

125 VDC or 120 VAC 125

250 VDC 250

Dual PS 24 VDC (for multiple PLC applications) D24

Dual PS 48 VDC (for multiple PLC applications) D48

Dual PS 125 VDC or 120 VAC (for multiple PLC applications) D125

Dual PS 250 VDC (for multiple PLC applications) D250

Redundant Power Supply Voltage Input

None 0

24 VDC 24

48 VDC 48

125 VDC or 120 VAC 125

250 VDC 250

Dual PS 24 VDC (for multiple PLC applications) D24

Dual PS 48 VDC (for multiple PLC applications) D48

Dual PS 125 VDC or 120 VAC (for multiple PLC applications) D125

Dual PS 250 VDC (for multiple PLC applications) D250

Power Supply Interface

With Multiprotocol (RS-449, V.35, X.21) Digital I/O MP

Front System Display Module

Without Digital Teleprotection Functionality No

Redundant Controller

Yes R

No 0

System I/O Ethernet Port Type

Electrical E

Fiber Optic F

GPS for System Clock Synchronization

Yes G

No 0

Front Functional Modules (Select Eight with 6U and Two with 3U)

Power Line Carrier FSK or On/Off (50 Ohms) w/CLI Meter

Power Line Carrier FSK or On/Off (75 Ohms) w/CLI Meter

TX Only Power Line Carrier FSK (50 Ohms)

TX Only Power Line Carrier FSK (75 Ohms)

RX Only Power Line Carrier FSK (50/75 Ohms) w/CLI Meter

Power Line Carrier FSK or On/Off - No Hybrid (50 Ohms) w/CLI Meter

Power Line Carrier for External Power Amp

Empty

Rear I/O Terminal Block Type

Screw S

Commpression C

Rear I/O Modules (Select Ten with 6U and Four with 3U )

Occupied Slot Based On Front Module Selection

Empty

Discrete I/O Units

6 Inputs

6 Solid State Outputs

6 Relay Outputs

12 Inputs

12 Solid State Outputs

12 Relay Outputs

6 Solid State Outputs and 6 Relay Outputs

6 Solid State Outputs and 6 Inputs

6 Relay Outputs and 6 Inputs

Current Limiting Output

None 0

48 Vdc CL48

125 Vdc CL125

Effective: 3/16/17

Consumes two rear slots in corresponding slot number

Fro

nt S

lot 4

Re

ar S

lot 7

Re

ar S

lot 8

Re

ar S

lot 9

Re

ar S

lot 1

0

Consumes two rear slots in corresponding slot number

Re

ar S

lot 2

Re

ar S

lot 3

Re

ar S

lot 4

Re

ar S

lot 5

Re

ar S

lot 6

Consumes two rear slots in corresponding slot number

SI

RI

SR

SS

RR

II

RE

SE

IE

X

0

Consumes two rear slots in corresponding slot number

Consumes two rear slots in corresponding slot number

0

PR & 0 (uses two slots)

PN & 0 (uses two slots)

PX & 0 (uses two slots)

T7 & 0 (uses two slots)

RFL® GARD Pro™ 6U - Ordering Information

P5 & 0 (uses two slots)

Fro

nt S

lot 3

Fro

nt S

lot 2

Fro

nt S

lot 1

Re

ar S

lot 1

Rear Slots 1 through 10

/-------------------------------Select 10 I/O------------------------------\

Front Slots 8 through 1

Consumes two rear slots in corresponding slot number

Consumes two rear slots in corresponding slot number

/--------------------Select 8 Functions------------------\

Fro

nt S

lot 8

Fro

nt S

lot 7

P7 & 0 (uses two slots)

T5 & 0 (uses two slots)

Fro

nt S

lot 6

Fro

nt S

lot 5

Page 15: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Safety Instructions

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

1-1

Safety Instructions Section 1.

1.1 Warnings and Safety Summary

The equipment described in this manual contains high voltage.

Exercise due care during operation and servicing. Read the safety

summary below.!

1.1.1 Safety Summary

The following safety precautions must be observed at all times during operation, service, and

repair of this equipment. Failure to comply with these precautions, or with specific warnings

elsewhere in this manual, violates safety standards of design, manufacture, and intended use of

this product. HPS/RFL assumes no liability for failure to comply with these requirements.

Ground the Chassis

The chassis must be grounded to reduce shock hazard and allow the equipment to perform

properly. Equipment supplied with three-wire AC power cables must be plugged into an

approved three-contact electric outlet. All other equipment is provided with a rear-panel

protective earth terminal, which must be connected to a proper electrical ground by suitable

cabling. The location of the protective earth terminal on the HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ system

is shown below. Refer to the wiring diagram supplied with the unit for additional information

on chassis and/or cabinet grounding.

A protective earth stud at the lower right rear of the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system chassis is the

main ground for the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system.

MAJOR MINOR

Protective Earth Stud

Figure 1-1. Location of Protective Earth Stud

Page 16: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Safety Instructions

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

1-2

Do not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere or in Wet or Damp Areas!

Do not operate the product in the presence of flammable gases or fumes, or in any area that is

wet or damp. Operating any electrical equipment under these conditions can result in a definite

safety hazard.

Keep Away from Live Circuits

Operating personnel should never remove covers. Component replacement and internal

adjustments must be done by qualified service personnel. Before attempting any work inside

the product, disconnect it from the power source and discharge the circuit by temporarily

grounding it. This will remove any dangerous voltages that may still be present after power is

removed.

Unrestricted operator access is only permitted to the front of the unit when hazardous voltage is

applied. It is the responsibility of the installer to restrict access to the rear terminal blocks

where hazardous voltage may exist.

Do not Substitute Parts or Modify Equipment!

Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not install substitute parts or make

unauthorized modifications to the equipment. The product may be returned to HPS/RFL for

service and repair, to ensure that all safety features are maintained.

Read the Manual!

Operators should read this manual before attempting to use the equipment, to learn how to use

the equipment properly and safely. Service personnel must be properly trained and have the

proper tools and equipment before attempting to make adjustments or repairs.

Service personnel must recognize that whenever work is being done on the product, there is a

potential electrical shock hazard and appropriate protection measures must be taken. Electrical

shock can result in serious injury, because it can cause unconsciousness, cardiac arrest, and

brain damage.

Throughout this manual, warnings appear before procedures that are potentially dangerous, and

cautions appear before procedures that may result in equipment damage or service outage if not

performed properly. The instructions contained in these warnings and cautions must be

followed exactly.

Page 17: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Safety Instructions

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

1-3

1.1.2 Additional Warnings

WARNING!

On initial installation, ensure that all modules are fully seated into connectors before powering

on the unit.

WARNING!

Follow all of your company’s policies and procedures regarding the installation of AC powered

or DC powered equipment. If there is a conflict between any procedure in this manual and your

company’s safety rules, then your company’s safety rules must take priority.

WARNING!

Individual double pole disconnects must be installed between the building or station battery

supply and the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system power supply(ies). This must be done for both the

main and back-up supply.

WARNING!

The power supplies used in this equipment utilize fuses on both input lines. Therefore in AC

applications the neutral line is fused. When a fuse is blown on the neutral line the internal

circuits may be energized.

1.1.3 Additional Cautions

CAUTION

Any installation using an enclosed cabinet with a swing-out rack must be securely fastened to

the floor. This will prevent the cabinet from falling forward when the rack is moved outward.

CAUTION

This equipment contains static sensitive devices. Persons working on this equipment must

observe electro static discharge (ESD) precautions before opening the unit or working on the

rear of the chassis. As a minimum you must do the following: Use anti-static devices such as

wrist straps and floor mats.

Additional warnings and cautions appear throughout the manual, these warnings and cautions

must be followed exactly.

Page 18: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Safety Instructions

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

1-4

NOTICE

RFL products are not designed for safety critical direct control of nuclear reactors and should

not be used as such.

NOTICE

The use of ungrounded instruments such as hand held voltmeters has been shown to generate

Electro-Static Discharge. Care should be taken when using such devices on test points internal

to HPS/RFL equipment. Specifically, the use of probes manufactured under the Pomona brand

is not recommended.

1.2 External Labels, Warning and Cautions

Note the position of the power supply label so that the delivered unit’s configuration may be

verified with how it was ordered.

CAUTIONTO PREVENT ELECTRICAL SHOCK

PROPER CAUTION MUST BE EXERCISED WHEN SERVICING THIS EQUIPMENT

ALL TERMINALS ON THE REAR OF THIS UNIT MAY HAVE HIGH VOLTAGE !

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

rules and regulations. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device may not

cause harmful interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference including

interference that may cause undesired operation.

CAUTION

!

FOR YOUR SAFETY

THE INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND

MAINTENANCE OF THIS EQUIPMENT

SHOULD BE PERFORMED BY

QUALIFIED PERSONS ONLY.

3U PLC Pro shown, position of

labels on 6U unit similar

This system left the factory configured as follows:

48/125VDC

120VAC

250VDC

220VAC

48/125VDC

120VAC

250VDC

220VAC

24VDC

24VDC

Power Supply 1

Power Supply 2

Input Modules 48VDC24VDC 125VDC 250VDC

Input Modules can be configured fo 24V, 48V, 125V

or 250V by changing jumper positions.

See the manual for further information.

Power Supply and Input Module boxes will be checked as per

factory configuration.

Figure 1-2. External Labels, Warnings and Cautions

Page 19: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Description

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

2-1

System Description Section 2.

2.1 Key Features for the HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System

Figure 2-1. The HPS/RFL GARD Pro System

World class, easy to use Graphical User Interface (GUI)

Use 6U chassis for up to 8-functions or 3U chassis for up to 2-functions

Integrated Protective Relay and Communications System

Selectable redundancy for power supply, main processor, and functional modules

Factory customized programmable logic for specific applications

Optional built-in GPS receiver

Page 20: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Description

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

2-2

2.2 Supplied Drawings

Refer to the “as supplied” drawings furnished with your HPS/RFL GARD Pro system unit for

detailed descriptions of the connections that must be made to your system. An example

drawing is shown below.

Front view of the RFL™

GARD Pro™ System

chassis

Front view of RFL™ GARD

Pro™ System chassis with front

panel removed

Rear view of RFL™ GARD

Pro™ System chassisJumper Settings

(PLC option)Input/Output

mapping

System Jumper

Settings

Figure 2-2. Supplied Drawings

2.3 The HPS/RFL GARD Pro System Modules with Available Options

Table 2-1 HPS/RFL GARD Pro System Module with Available Options

Module Type Module Assembly Number Refer to the following Sections

Base System Module

Controller Module RF-500400-2-20 -

Display Module RF-500410-9 2.5, 4.10

Power Supply Module RF-500305, RF-500315, RF-500325

8.1.2

Power Supply I/O Module RF-500310 Series 3.6.2

System I/O Module RF-500430-1, RF-500435, RF-500435-1, RF-500420-1, RF-500425-1

3.6

I/O Base Module I/O Base Module RF-500800 Series 3.6.1, 4.9, 4.9.3

Input Output Modules

Input Module RF-500805 2.4.1, 4.9.1

Solid State Output RF-500810 2.4.1

Relay Output RF-500815 2.4.1, 4.9.3

Available Options

PLC Digital Module RF-500455-1 6.3

PLC Analog Module RF-500935 Series 2.4.1, 5.2, 5.4, 5.5.3

Current Limit Module RF-106510 Series 3.6

Touch Screen Display (TSD) RF-500480-20 2.8

Page 21: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Description

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

2-3

2.4 The HPS/RFL GARD Pro System Slot Location and Module Description

The 3U chassis has 4-slots and the 6U chassis has 11-slots available in the front and rear of the

HPS/RFL GARD Pro system; however the base system modules have fixed locations (slots) in

both chassis as shown in the following illustrations. The illustrations show the location of the

base system modules and the slot numbering schemes in both chassis. Note that the PLC

Analog Module shown on the following pages uses two slots in the rear of the unit.

Note: The component numbering corresponds to paragraphs in section 2.4.1.

Display Module (Slot 1)

Functional Modules (Slot 3 and 4)

Single Main Controller (Slot 2) SparePower Supply No2.

Power Supply No1.

3U Midplane

4. System I/O Module

1. Main Input/Output

Module

5. Power Supply I/O Module

3. Power Line Carrier Analog Module (Option)

2. Spare

6. Extraction

Tool

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

Front of Unit

(Front Panel Removed)

Rear of Unit

Figure 2-3. Module Placement in the HPS/RFL GARD Pro System (3U)

Shown below is a typical HPS/RFL GARD Pro system 6U chassis arrangement. This

arrangement has two PLC Modules with associated second Power Supply and two I/O Base

Modules.

Page 22: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Description

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

2-4

Note: The System I/O Module is different in appearance than the 3U chassis, but has the same

functions.

1234567891011

6U Midplane

Power Supply No2

Power Supply No1

Spare

Controller Module Redundant

Controller Module

Display Module

Second I/O Module

4. System I/O Module

1. Input/Output Modules

3. Power Line Carrier Analog

Modules (optional)

5. Power Supply I/O Module2. Spare Slot

2. Spare Slot

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Front of Unit

(Front Panel Removed)

Rear of Unit

Figure 2-4. Module Placement in the HPS/RFL GARD Pro System (6U)

Page 23: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Description

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

2-5

2.4.1 Module Descriptions

1. Display Module

The display module is required. It consists of the front panel LEDs and the Front

Ethernet Port.

The display unit handles all HMI communications tasks. The front of the board is

supplied with 20 programmable tri-colored LED’s and a TCP/IP port for PC web

browser connection.

The main user interface is a web server connected to a PC via the TCP/IP port. There is

an optional front mounted TSD (Touch Screen Display, see 2.8).

Page 24: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Description

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

2-6

The programmable LEDs are factory configured or customized by the end user.

Note Typically not all the LED indicators are used.

POWER

NET

RESET

12

1920

Trip Key 1

Trip Key 2

Trip RX 1

Trip RX 2

Guard RX

RX Alarm

TX Fail

RPM Alarm

System Major Alarm

System Minor Alarm

Green indicates that power is

applied to the GARD

Programmable reset button

will reset the LED's as specified

RJ-45 Ethernet Port

LED's shown active

Figure 2-5. Programmable LEDs

2. Input/Output Module:

This is an I/O Base Module also known as the Discrete I/O Base Module which is the

main carrier board for the following types of I/O modules:

o Input Unit

o Solid State Output Unit

o Relay Output Unit

Page 25: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Description

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

2-7

Below is an I/O Base Module with a Relay Output Unit and Input Unit attached.

Input/Output modules can be freely installed in no particular order.

Extraction Tool

RF Shield

Mid-Plane Connector

Input UnitRelay Output

Unit

Carrier Board

24 – Position I/O

Terminal Block

Voltage Selection

JumpersForm A/B

Switches

124

Figure 2-6. Base Input/Output Unit showing Plug-On Boards

Input Unit:

The Input Unit has six inputs which can accommodate 24, 48, 125 or 250Vdc. These

voltages are set on the board by way of selectable jumpers (See Section 4.9.2).

Solid State Output Unit:

The Solid State Output Unit has six solid state outputs. The contacts are always Form A

(normally open).

Relay Output Unit:

The Relay Output Unit has six relay outputs. The contacts can be Form A (normally

open) or Form B (normally closed) and can be selected by the user with switches SW1

through SW6 on the Relay Output Unit (See Section 4.9.3)

3. Spare:

An open slot(s) for installation of another function module.

4. Power Line Carrier Analog Module (optional):

The Power Line Carrier Analog Module is part of a module set which includes a Digital

PLC Module that plugs into the front of the chassis. The digital board has eight LEDs

and five test points on its front edge for service use only. The PLC Analog Module has

two BNC connectors for connection to the power line interface, a six pin terminal block

Page 26: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Description

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

2-8

for connecting a CLI meter or second power supply. There are also fine and coarse

tuning controls and various variable resistors used to control the amplifier.

See Section 5 for a complete description of the PLC function.

5. System I/O Module:

The function of the System I/O Module is to provide the physical connection point

between the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system and the substation network. In addition to

this, the System I/O Module provides the following three timing functions:

o Optional GPS

o IRIG-B

o 1PPS (1 pulse per second timing signal)

An Optional GPS interface module (GPS time receiver) can be installed in the System

I/O Module. When it is installed, a GPS antenna must be connected to the SMA series

connector labeled “GPS” at the rear of the System I/O Module. When the GPS option is

installed, the BNC connectors labeled “IRIG-B’ and “1PPS” function as outputs and can

be used to drive equipment external to the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system. In this case the

IRIG-B output is un-modulated.

When the GPS built-in receiver is included, it resides as a piggy-back module on the

System I/O Module. The GPS receiver has to be connected to an externally mounted

antenna, provided as an accessory as shown below.

Figure 2-7. GPS Antenna

Also located on the System I/O Module is a six pin (RS-485) terminal block for use with

the DNP protocol. The six pin connector is always installed, but only used when DNP

is enabled over RS-485. The Ethernet port is used for remote management purposes.

An RS-232 port is also available for management.

6. Power Supply I/O Module:

The Powers Supply I/O Module has the following three functions:

o Connects the internal power supplies to the external power source(s)

o Provides major and minor alarm relay contacts

o Provides access to the digital interface (RS-449/X.21/V.35)

The digital interface is typically not used in PLC applications, but can be used to

connect to external equipment if required.

Page 27: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Description

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

2-9

7. Extraction Tool:

An extraction tool is included on the rear of the chassis. This tool is used when

removing the I/O Base Module as shown in Figure 2-6.

2.5 Front Panel Indicators/Connections

The only indicators present on the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system front panel are 20

programmable tri-colored LEDs and a green power ON light. The LEDs are normally factory

set, but can be customized by the user. The main user interface is through an Ethernet port for

connection to a web based server.

Shown below is a typical HPS/RFL GARD Pro system LED configuration for a 3U chassis.

Note that in most applications not all the LEDs are used. A 6U chassis has the same

configuration however the LEDs are orientated vertically.

RESETNETPWR

2

Green indicates that power is

applied to the RFL™ GARD

Pro™ System

Programmable reset

button will reset the

LED's as specified

LED assignments are

printed on a card and

inserted into a clear

plastic pocket attached

to the Front Panel

1.

3.

5.

7.

9.

11.

13.

15.

17.

19. SYSTEM MAJOR ALARM

2. TRIP KEY 1

4. TRIP KEY 2

6. TRIP RX 1

8. TRIP RX 2

10. GUARD RX

12.

14. RX ALARM

16. TX FAIL

18. RPM ALARM

20. SYSTEM MINOR ALARM

Each LED can have four color

states: Off, Green, Yellow and Red.

LED,s are shown active

4 6 8 10 12 1416 18 20

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 1719

RJ-45 Ethernet port for direct

connection to a laptop or PC

LED Indication: No illumination – no connection

Left indicator, solid green – connection made

Right indicator, flashing green – data transfer

Figure 2-8. HPS/RFL GARD Pro System Front Panel, Indicators/Connections

Page 28: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Description

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

2-10

2.6 Graphical User Interface (GUI)

Shown below is an example screen from the web enabled HPS/RFL GARD Pro system

Graphical User Interface (GUI). Once accessed with the user’s laptop or PC this interface is

used to configure and monitor the system.

All interaction with the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system is through a standard web browser. The

web pages reside in the device; no special application software is required on the PC.

Figure 2-9. Graphical User Interface

Web browser technology provides a much higher level of ease-of-use as compared to

conventional “menu driven” operation. Viewing device status, accessing diagnostic and test

functions and changing settings is a snap.

The GUI has the following user benefits:

Intuitive, industry standard dialogs

Clear, concise navigation with dynamic sidebar

Time to commission, test and maintain the system is greatly reduced

Page 29: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Description

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

2-11

2.7 Controller Redundancy

2.7.1 Redundancy Controller Overview

The HPS/RFL GARD Pro system Controller Module offers a redundant operation mode when

used in a 6U chassis. When equipped with two Controller Modules, a GARD system can

disable a faulty module and transfer its functionality to the standby unit.

The redundant-mode control elements are effectively independent of basic GARD functions and

features. Redundancy subsystems monitor the condition of the module and take part in

determining which module is active.

When only a single Controller is present in a GARD chassis, the redundancy subsystem still

continues monitoring, however, it has no effect on the active state of the Controller. A single

module cannot be made inactive.

CAUTION

System Firmware version 2.1.0 or greater is required for Redundancy. Both controllers must

have matching system firmware versions for correct operation.

2.7.2 Rules of Operation

Two GARD Controllers present in the chassis in their dedicated slots facilitate the redundant

mode of operation. Only 6U chassis offer two controller slots. Redundant mode is not possible

with a 3U chassis.

When Both Controller slots are in use, Slot 11 has priority, while Slot 10 the standby

(Redundant) Controller has a short delay allowing the Main controller to become active first.

An “ACTIVE” module drives or controls the traffic within the chassis and configures other

submodules. An “INACTIVE” module does not output any signals onto mid-plane buses.

The basic rules governing swapping between the active and inactive state were designed to be

as simple as possible and to minimize disturbances to the system and prevent swapping into a

faulty or non-existent module.

A module cannot decide by itself to become active. It can become active only if the

other Controller fails or is disabled.

A failed module does not necessary become inactive. A swap to the other module may

happen only if the other module exists and is itself not in fault. A system with

Redundancy will block a swap into a faulty module.

There are no levels or degrees of fault conditions within a Controller module. A faulty,

disabled or non-existent module is treated the same way, since its state is not

trustworthy anymore.

Page 30: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Description

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

2-12

An inactive Controller module always obtains its configuration for the chassis from the

active module – immediately after power-up and with continuing updates thereafter.

2.7.3 Implementation

Each GARD Controller contains a monitoring system, which monitors vital hardware signals

within the module. The CPU and DSP Processors monitor their own operations and interfaces.

A dedicated communications channel (“mirroring”) is used to copy system information, such as

configuration, from the currently active to the inactive module. This allows a newly installed

(and inactive) controller to become configured and ready to take over control if required.

Dedicated signaling channels on the midplane are used to convey faults and activity states of

the Controllers to their companion modules.

The active module has full control of the system, just as if it was the only one present. The

inactive module is idling in full operational condition. All drivers of its signals to the

backplane, Ethernet, etc. are disabled.

Besides the Controller, no “slave” module (channel module or functional module) in the GARD

chassis is aware of the presence of two Controllers, nor does it know which one is active. The

system operates the same way, regardless of which Controller is active.

If an out-of-bounds condition is detected within a Controller, an on-board fault condition is set.

Based on the rules of redundant operation, the active and inactive states may be swapped

between the two Controllers.

A Controller swap will affect GARD functionality momentarily while the “Inactive” controller

becomes “Active” and takes over control. Critical functionality will be restored within 1

minute, after the swap occurs.

2.7.4 Controls and Indicators

LED Indicator

LED indicator DS3, located at the card edge of the module, shows the state of redundancy

control of a Controller Module.

Mode Switch

A request to take the Controller module off-line (inactive) is made by moving card-edge switch

SW2 from “Normal” position to “Disable” position. This is equivalent to creating an on-board

failure, and will be indicated by the appropriate color of indicator DS3 (color will change from

Green to Orange).

If the rules of redundant-mode operation are satisfied, the Controller will become inactive and

Page 31: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Description

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

2-13

the other module will take over.

It is important to remember that even if the Controller is in a failed state, it may be made

inactive only if a good companion module exists.

The rules of operation are designed to enforce the continuity of operation for the whole system.

Therefore, a module cannot be made inactive if the other Controller is in a fault condition or

does not exist.

Returning SW2 to the “Normal” position will clear the on-board fault condition. It does not

automatically make the module active. As per the rules of operation, the Controller Module

becomes active only if the other module fails or is disabled.

Configuration Mirroring

An inactive Controller module will retrieve (mirror) a copy of a system configuration from the

active module. This process starts immediately after power-up or reset of the Controller and

continues as long as the module remains inactive.

When manually forcing a switch between redundant controllers (for example, installing a new

module from a set of spares), the user should observe whether the first configuration transfer

completed, as indicated by DS3. If switched too early, the newly active Controller may be

configured incorrectly.

After first successful mirror, the inactive Controller will contain a copy of configuration that is

no more than one mirroring cycle behind the active module.

Web Page, Controller Card, Status Color Codes

Refer to Table 2-2. Web Page, Controller Card, Status Color Codes for the Web Page,

Controller Card, status color codes. The first column in the table indicates the border color of

Controller Card slots 10 and 11. The border color can be gray, green, or red. Once the border

color is determined, refer to the second column of the table to determine the status of the

Controller Card modules in slots 10 and 11.

Table 2-2. Web Page, Controller Card, Status Color Codes

Slot 10 or 11 Controller Card Border Color Controller Card Status

Gray Card Healthy And Inactive

Green Card Healthy And Active

Red Card Not Healthy And Inactive

Page 32: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Description

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

2-14

Figure 2-10. Chassis Configuration Status web page for 6U Chassis with Redundancy

Figure 2-11. Chassis Configuration Status web page for 6U Chassis with

Unhealthy Inactive Controller

Page 33: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Description

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

2-15

2.8 TSD (Touch Screen Display)

2.8.1 Front Panel TSD overview

The HPS/RFL GARD Pro system supports an optional Touch Screen Display (TSD). The TSD

will display the status of various modules in the GARD system and features a Push Button

Interface display that is easily configured from a Laptop computer. The screen on the TSD can

be adjusted for landscape display if the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system is mounted vertically in a

rack. The illustration below shows the TSD mounted in a GARD 3U chassis, its mounting and

operation is the same in a 6U chassis. The Push Button Interface can be accessed from the main

menu or by pressing the Home button. A stylus is provided with the TSD.

Note: The screen must be operated with the stylus.

BACK REFRESH HOME

Touch Screen Display

Simple browser type control

buttons:

Touch Screen Display Main Menu

Location of Stylus

NET RESETPWR

Figure 2-12. Touch Screen Display in 3U Chassis.

Page 34: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Description

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

2-16

2.8.2 TSD Buttons

There are 3 physical buttons on the TSD hardware. They are, from left-to-right: “Back”,

“Refresh”, and “Home”. Their function is displayed below:

Table 2-3 Button States and Actions

Back Refresh Home Action

OFF OFF OFF None

OFF OFF ON Go to Home screen

OFF ON OFF Refresh current screen

ON OFF OFF Go back to prev. screen

OFF ON ON Calibrate Touch screen

ON ON OFF Show Keyboard

ON ON ON Reboot TSD

2.8.3 TSD Screen orientation

The TSD display orientation is normally factory set for Portrait display. It can be factory set for

Landscape if the GARD is mounted vertically. In the rare event that the orientation of the

Touch Screen requires changing proceed as follows:

1. Shut OFF the main power to the GARD unit.

2. Carefully remove the Front Panel (4-screws) to gain access to the rear of the

TSD.

3. Set the Slide Switch as required, see below.

PORT LAND

Figure 2-13. Touch Screen Orientation

4. Reinstall the Front Panel and power up the unit.

Page 35: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Description

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

2-17

2.8.4 Touch Screen initialization

The following messages will appear when first initializing the touch screen. Initialize the TSD

by doing the following:

1) Access the Calibration screen by holding down the “Refresh” and “Home” buttons

simultaneously.

2) Press the center of the target with the stylus as it moves around the screen.

Note: Initialization is retained in memory and once factory calibrated no further user

intervention is normally required.

Press and hold the stylus briefly on the target.

Repeat as the target moves around the screen.

Tap the touch screen with the stylus

Figure 2-14. Touch Screen Initialization.

Page 36: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Description

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

2-18

2.8.5 Main Menu:

The following example shows the System Information, IP Information and Power Supply

information displayed on the TSD. This gives the user an overall picture of the GARD system;

individual modules will display information unique to that module.

Figure 2-15. System Information

2.8.5.1 SOE: Sequence of Events

This TSD page will list the most recent SOE’s (Sequence of Events). For event details access

the PC webpage.

Most current SOE's in blocks of 64 (2048 Max).

1-64 12/13/2016 - 12/12/2016

65-128

12/12/2016

SOE Records

Figure 2-16. Events Log (SOE’s)

Page 37: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Description

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

2-19

2.8.5.2 SOE: Push Button Menu

This TSD page lists the current Push Button Configuration.

OFF 0

Breaker 12

ON 1

ON 2 OFF2

Breaker 22

OFF 1ON1

ON 4

ON 6

ON 3 OFF3

OFF4 ON 5

Reset

Mod 12 Mod 22

OFF5

OFF6

Description 5 Description 6

Description 7 Description 8

Figure 2-17. Push Button Menu

2.8.5.3 SOE: Test Menu

The TSD Test page allows the user to run module specific tests and calibrations.

Figure 2-18. Test Menu

Page 38: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Description

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

2-20

2.8.5.4 SOE: Inventory Menu

Figure 2-19. Inventory Menu

Page 39: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Installation

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

3-1

Installation Section 3.

3.1 Introduction

This section contains installation instructions for the HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ system,

including unpacking, mounting, and interconnection wiring. For details on using the 50 and

100W Amplifier option with HPS/RFL GARD Pro system PLC applications See Section 5.6.

3.2 Unpacking

The HPS/RFL GARD Pro system equipment may be supplied as an individual chassis or may

be interconnected with other chassis or assemblies as part of a system. For unpacking

instructions see the following:

Paragraph Chassis type

3.2.1 individual

3.2.2 interconnected

3.2.1 Individual Chassis

HPS/RFL GARD Pro system terminals supplied as individual chassis are packed in their own

shipping cartons:

1. Open each carton carefully to make sure the equipment is not damaged.

2. After the chassis is removed from the carton, carefully examine all packing material to

make sure no items of value are discarded.

3. Make sure all modules are fully seated in the chassis. The machine screws securing all

I/O modules to the rear of the chassis should be fully tightened.

Caution

Pin damage from excessive force

Care should be taken when connecting individual modules to the mid-plane in either the 3U or

6U chassis. It is possible to damage the connecting pins if excessive force is used.

3.2.2 Interconnected Chassis

HPS/RFL GARD Pro system terminals ordered as part of a larger system may be

interconnected with other chassis and mounted in a relay rack or cabinet, or on shipping rails

for installation into a rack or cabinet at the customer's site. In such cases, the entire assembly is

enclosed in a wood crate or delivered by air-ride van:

1. If the equipment is crated, carefully open the crate to avoid damaging the equipment.

2. Remove the equipment from the crate and carefully examine all packing materials to

make sure no items of value are discarded.

Page 40: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Installation

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

3-2

3. Make sure all modules are fully seated in the chassis. The machine screws securing all

I/O modules to the rear of the chassis should be fully tightened.

3.3 Mounting

After unpacking, HPS/RFL GARD Pro system equipment must be securely mounted, following

the instructions in the following paragraphs. Use the procedure that suits your equipment:

- individual chassis

- interconnected chassis installed in racks or cabinets

- interconnected chassis mounted on shipping rails

3.3.1 Individual Chassis

HPS/RFL GARD Pro system terminals housed in individual chassis have two mounting ears

(one on each side). Hole sizes and spacing’s conform with EIA standards so the HPS/RFL

GARD Pro system can be mounted in any standard 19-inch rack or cabinet. Complete

mounting dimensions are shown in the following figure.

Page 41: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Installation

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

3-3

WARNING! Falling cabinet

Any installation using an enclosed cabinet with a swing-out rack must be securely fastened to

the floor. This will prevent the cabinet from falling forward when the rack is moved outward.

14.5

(36.83)

5.25

(13.335)

19

(48.26)

18.312

(46.512)

2.25

(5.715)

1.5

(3.81)

17.625

(44.768)

17.625

(44.768)

10.5

(26.67)

19

(48.26)

18.312

(46.512)

1.5

(3.81)2.25

(5.715)

3.0

(7.62)2.25

(5.715)

Inches

(cm)

3U Chassis

6U Chassis

Figure 3-1. Mounting dimensions for the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system chassis

Page 42: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Installation

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

3-4

3.3.2 Interconnected Chassis Installed in Rack or Cabinet

Systems mounted in racks or cabinets at the factory are to be placed in position and then bolted

to the floor or wall, as appropriate, to secure the equipment in place. The type of hardware used

will depend upon the particular surface to which the rack or cabinet is being mounted. Because

of this, mounting hardware is not supplied with the rack or cabinet.

3.3.3 Interconnected Chassis Mounted on Shipping Rails

For delivery, equipment is mounted on shipping rails. To remove the shipping rails and mount

the equipment in a rack or cabinet, proceed as follows:

1. Place the equipment as close to the front of the rack or cabinet as possible, with the rear

panels of the equipment facing the front of the rack or cabinet.

2. Remove all the screws securing the shipping rails to the equipment.

3. Slide the equipment into the rack or cabinet.

4. Install and tighten screws to all panels to secure the equipment in place.

3.4 Ventilation

The specified operating temperature range for HPS/RFL GARD Pro system equipment is -20oC

to +70oC (-4

oF to +158

oF). Operation at higher temperatures may affect system reliability and

performance. Systems installed in enclosed cabinets should be ventilated to keep the

temperature inside the cabinet within limits.

CAUTION Improper wiring can cause false trips

Normal system operation switching of relay contacts can produce voltage spikes. These spikes

can travel down the relay output leads and induce currents in other leads. These induced

currents can result in false trips. To reduce this possibility, use a shielded twisted pair for each

input lead, and ground the shield at the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system chassis only. As an added

precaution, do not bundle input, output, and power leads into the same harness, and keep them

as far apart as possible.

3.5 System Module I/O Connections

The HPS/RFL GARD Pro system has a system I/O module used for timing and remote access

functions.

Make connections as required as shown below.

Page 43: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Installation

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

3-5

IRIG-B timing

connection

1 – Pulse per

second timing

connection

GPS antenna

connection

(optional)

Ethernet connection

for remote access

RS-232 connections

(Management port)

RS-485 connection for

DNP3

Right LED indication

Display and transmit status:

Blinking indicates link and Ethernet frames being transmittedLeft LED indication

Display link and display status:

Solid indicates link

Blinking indicates link and Ethernet frames being received

Figure 3-2. System Module I/O Connections

3.5.1 Status LEDs

The status LEDs at the top of the unit provides visual indication of the network connection.

The following table describes the states.

LED Display display status

Left LED Solid Link

Off Not connected

Right LED Blinking Link and Ethernet frames being transmitted

Solid No frames transmitted.

Page 44: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Installation

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

3-6

3.5.1 Ethernet connection for local access

The front Ethernet port provides access to perform the initial setup of HPS/RFL GARD Pro

system. The built-in DHCP server assigns an IP address in the 192.168.1 subnet. With this

access the user can assign parameters such as the network IP address for the rear Ethernet port.

Note:

To access the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system remotely the connection must occur through the

rear port.

3.5.2 Ethernet connection for remote access

The rear Ethernet Port provides the means to connect the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system with the

TCP/IP network. The connection to the TCP/IP network must occur through the rear port.

The rear port provides DNP3 to pass data to the master and TCP/IP access for system

maintenance.

3.5.3 RS-485 connection for DNP3

The HPS/RFL GARD Pro system DNP3 slave is required to communicate with the DNP3

master over the rear Ethernet port and/or the RS485 2-wire/4-wire interface. Both interfaces

may be active for DNP use at the same time. For example one DNP master can access the

HPS/RFL GARD Pro system through RS485 and up to two other DNP masters may access

through the rear Ethernet port.

When using the RS-485 protocol, connections are made to the System I/O Module on the rear

of the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system chassis as shown below.

Page 45: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Installation

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

3-7

GPS

IPPS

IRIG-B

RS-485

MOD BUS

DNP

Rear of 3U Chassis

ETHERNET

1PPS

RS-485

DNP

POWER SUPPLY 1

ALARM

Rear of 6U Chassis

1

2

3

4

5

6

TDB+

TDB-

GND

RDB+

RDB-

GND

2W

RS-485

DNP

4W

GPS

IRIG-B

RS-232

ETHERNET

Figure 3-3. RS-485 DNP3 connection

The use of RS-485 provides remote management of Remote Telemetry Units (RTUs) or

Intelligent Electronic Devices (IEDs) such as the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system without

requiring a separate Ethernet connection for each IED.

Page 46: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Installation

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

3-8

IED

RFL™ GARD

Pro™ System

RS-485 RS-485

Slaves

RS-485

IEDRTUMaster

TCP/IP

TCP/IP

Master Master

Network 2

Master

Network 1

Figure 3-4. Network connections

The diagram shows a HPS/RFL GARD Pro system with two masters through the rear Ethernet

port and a third master through the RTU on RS-485. The three masters can be in the same or

different networks.

3.5.4 RS-232 connections (Management port)

This port provides an IRIG-B reference signal from the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system. See

section 3.7.3 for more information.

3.5.5 IRIG-B timing connection

IRIG-B is part of a timing standard that varies primarily by rate. The timing for IRIG-B is a

100 Hz pulse rate which the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system can supplement with an optional GPS

signal.

The timing maintains the system clock so the time of remote devices accurately reports the

messages sent back to the controller. The standard was established before GPS so industries

that need properly correlated times adopted one of the IRIG timecodes. IRIG-B is common in

the data handling systems, communication systems and telemetry systems such as power

industry.

Page 47: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Installation

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

3-9

IRIG-B is unidirectional with signals sent by the master to the slave devices to maintain a

uniform system time.

Find the settings for the IRIG-B in HPS/RFL GARD Pro system with and without the GPS in

section 3.7.

3.5.6 The 1 – Pulse per second timing connection

The 1-Pulse per Second signal provides a timing pulse each second. The shape of the pulse

makes the signal more precise than one second and can be a few microseconds or better. The

internal clock provides the timings less than a second with the 1-PPS signal providing system

accuracy.

The length of the transmission line and the resulting pulse distortion can affect the accuracy of a

signal.

3.5.7 GPS antenna connection (optional)

The optional GPS antenna takes the system timing from the GPS satellites.

When the GPS option is installed, the BNC connectors labeled “IRIG-B’ and “1PPS” function

as outputs and can be used to drive equipment external to the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system. In

this case the IRIG-B output is un-modulated.

3.6 Rear I/O, Alarm Relay and Input Power Connections

3.6.1 Rear I/O Terminal Block Connections

The terminal blocks on the rear of the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system chassis are conventional

screw-type barrier blocks. Wires can either be stripped or terminated in spade lugs, depending

on local practice. HPS/RFL recommends that wires be terminated by #6 ring lugs as an extra

safety precaution.

123456789

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

Typical terminal block with six

inputs and six relay outputs

Out 2 Out 1Out 3

In 2 In 1In 3In 4In 5In 6

Out 4Out 5Out 6

Output Input

Figure 3-5. Rear I/O Terminal Block Connections

Page 48: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Installation

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

3-10

Note:

I/O positions can be switched, or can be all outputs or all inputs. Consult the chassis drawing

referenced in Section 2.2 for I/O locations.

3.6.2 Alarm and Alert Relay Connections

The HPS/RFL GARD Pro system chassis has two SPDT (Form C) relays mounted in the Power

Supply I/O module. The terminals are labeled as shown on the following page. The Major

Alarm relay terminals are on the left of the figure and the Minor Alarm relay terminals are on

the right. The contacts are rated 100mA, 300Vdc, resistive load. The alarm relays will respond

to alarm and alert conditions. The functionality can be customized by the user as required.

Under normal operating conditions when the alarm conditions are healthy the relays are

energized, in an alarm or alert state the relays will be in the de-energized position.

Note All relay contacts are labeled in the de-energized position.

C

NC

NO

C

NC

NO

POWER SUPPLY 1 POWER SUPPLY 2

MAJOR MINOR

SW1 SW2

I 0 I 0

+ +- -

Relay

Contacts

Input

Power

Figure 3-6. Relay Connections/Power Supply I/O

WARNING!

Improper ground connections may result in system malfunctions, equipment damage, or

electric shock.

The HPS/RFL GARD Pro system must be properly grounded as described in the following

section before attempting to connect input power.

Page 49: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Installation

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

3-11

3.6.3 Chassis Ground Connections

A protective earth stud at the lower right rear of the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system chassis is the

main ground for the terminal.

MAJOR MINOR

Protective Earth Stud

Figure 3-7. Chassis Grounding Location

Grounding is accomplished by connecting a wire 6AWG or larger between this protective earth

stud and rack ground. The grounding wire should be kept as short and straight as possible, to

keep its resistance and inductance to a minimum.

Before attempting to make power connections, make sure the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system

terminal is equipped with a power supply designed to operate at the available input supply

voltage. This can be determined by checking the power supply label on the exterior of the unit,

as shown in FIGURE 1-2. If an external power supply is being used, check the markings on the

external power supply. If the wrong voltage is connected to the power supply, component

damage will result.

3.6.4 Input Power Connections

WARNING!

Electric shock, equipment damage

Install individual double pole disconnects between the building or station battery supply and

HPS/RFL GARD Pro system power supply. This must be done for both the main and back-up

supply.

CAUTION

Damage to the power supply

Power supplies are not hot swappable. Switch off power at the appropriate power supply

before installing or removing power supplies from the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system chassis

After all other connections have been made to the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system, input power

connections can be made to the Power Supply I/O at the rear of the chassis.

Before proceeding to connect power to the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system ensure that the main and

Page 50: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Installation

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

3-12

redundant power switches on the rear of the unit are in the “OFF” position and that the power wires

to be installed are disconnected at their source.

Make input power supply connections for all power supplies installed. Depending on the

number of power supplies installed the locations of the connections for each power supply are

shown in the following table:

Number Location at Front Terminal Block Label at Rear

1 Power Supply 1 Power Supply 1

1 Power Supply 2 Power Supply 2

2 Power Supply 1 and Power Supply 2

Input power connections can be either DC station battery voltage (24, 48, or 250VDC) or AC

voltage (125VAC or 220VAC), depending on which power supplies are installed in the chassis.

Station battery positive goes to the “+” terminal and station battery negative goes to the “-“

terminal. If AC input power is used, connections are made to the “+” and “-” terminals and the

polarity markings can be neglected.

Before connecting the power at its source and switching on the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system, check

the following:

Is the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system grounded correctly?

Is the installed HPS/RFL GARD Pro system power supply designed to operate at the

available input supply voltage?

Is the polarity of the supply power correct?

If installed in an enclosed cabinet, is the unit ventilated correctly?

Power connections may now be made to the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system.

Page 51: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Installation

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

3-13

3.7 System timing

Shown below are the jumper locations on the 3U System I/O Board for IRIG-B applications.

Please note that when the GPS plug-on module is installed J2 (not shown) on the GPS Module

can be set to grounded or isolated depending on the jumper positions. When in the grounded

position the shield of the co-axial cable will be grounded.

J11

J101

1

2

2

15

15

16

16J3 J12

IRIG

NORM NORM

IRIG

J6

J9

J4

J7

J8

J13

J14

1

1

SPARES

1 2

15 16

1 2

15 16

UNMODMOD

NONE50 OHM600 OHM

TERM

ISOLATEDGROUNDED

50 OHMNONE

600 OHM

Special application only, IRIG-B signal through rear RS-232 port

See 3.7.2Jumper Locations/GPS

Module Locating

Figure 3-8. HPS/RFL GARD Pro System – 3U Chassis, System I/O Board Jumper Locations

The following subsections list the jumper settings required when using the IRIG-B. The 6U

chassis is arranged in a similar manner.

Subsection Description

3.7.1 IRIG-B is used without the GPS plug-on module

3.7.2 IRIG-B is used without the GPS and second HPS/RFL GARD Pro system units

3.7.3 IRIG-B signal accessed through the rear RS-232 port on the HPS/RFL GARD

Pro system I/O Module

Page 52: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Installation

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

3-14

3.7.1 IRIG-B with no GPS

Table 3-1. Jumpers Required on System I/O Board when GPS Module is NOT INSTALLED

Jumper Jumper Installed across

these two terminals Function

J7 5-6 Must be installed

J8 11-12 Must be installed

13-14 & 15-16 IRIG-B, AGC is in the circuit

13-15 IRIG-B, AGC is bypassed

J10 1-2 Must be open

3-4 For Un-modulated IRIG-B inputs

5-6 & 7-8 For Modulated IRIG-B inputs

9-10 No IRIG-B termination

11-12 50 Ohm IRIG-B termination

13-14 600 Ohm IRIG-B termination

J11 1-2 IRIG-B shield is grounded

3-4 IRIG-B shield is isolated

5-6 Must be installed

9-10 No 1PPS termination

11-12 50 Ohm 1PPS termination

13-14 600 Ohm 1PPS termination

3.7.2 IRIG-B with GPS

When two HPS/RFL GARD Pro system units are connected as shown in the illustration below,

the second HPS/RFL GARD Pro system must have jumpers set on the System I/O board as

shown in Table 3-2 when a GPS receiver is connected. The location of the jumpers on the

board is shown in Figure 3-9.

Page 53: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Installation

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

3-15

Rear of GARD unit 1

Rear of GARD unit 2

GPS

GPS Receiver

Substation

IRIG-B out

IRIG-B in

The second GARD unit must have

the jumpers set on the System I/O

module as shown.

Figure 3-9. IRIG-B with GPS

Table 3-2. System I/O jumper Settings with IRIG-B and GPS

Jumper Jumper Installed Across

these two Terminals Jumper Position

J7 5-6 IN - Must be installed

J8 11-12 IN - Must be installed

13-15 IN - IRIG-B, AGC is bypassed

J10 3-4 IN - For Unmodulated IRIG-B inputs

13-14 IN - 600 Ohm IRIG-B termination

J11 1-2 IN - IRIG-B shield is grounded

5-6 IN - Must be installed

13-14 IN - 600 Ohm 1PPS termination

Note: All other jumpers should be removed (no connection).

3.7.3 IRIG-B Signal, Through Rear RS-232 Port

There may be a situation where a customer requires an IRIG-B signal accessed through the rear

RS-232 port on the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system I/O Module. To access the IRIG-B signal

through the RS-232 port set jumpers on the System I/O board as shown in 3.7.3.1.

The pins are used according to the following:

Pin 5 = Signal Ground

Pin 4 = IRIG-HI

Pin 6 = IRIG-LO

All other pins = "Not Used"

Page 54: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Installation

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

3-16

Figure 3-10. RS-232 Pin-Outs

3.7.3.1 Setting Procedure

1. Before accessing the System I/O board on either the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system 3U or

6U chassis power down the GARD unit.

2. Jumper J3 and J12 on the System I/O board need to be set to the IRIG-B position. This

will allow IRIG-B signals to be brought into the GARD through pin 4 and 6 on the RS-

232 connector.

3. Refer to the following figure for the location of Jumper J3 and J12. The System I/O

board is easily removed from the chassis as shown.

Partial view of rear of 3U GARD

chassis showing System I/O board

System I/O board

RS-232

ConnectorLoosen 4-screws and

slide out module to

access jumpers

Figure 3-11. Removing System I/O Board (3U)

4. After setting the jumpers, re-seat the applicable module and tighten the screws, do not

over tighten.

5. Re-apply power to the GARD.

Page 55: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Installation

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

3-17

See the following page for jumper locations on the 3U and 6U Chassis.

J11

J101

1

2

215

15

16

16J3 J12

IRIG

NORM NORM

IRIG

J6

J9

J4

J7

J8

J13

J14

1

1

SPARES

1 2

15 16

1 2

15 16

UNMODMOD

NONE50 OHM600 OHM

TERM

ISOLATEDGROUNDED

50 OHMNONE

600 OHM

Set jumper J12 and J3 to the

IRIG-B position

RS-232

Figure 3-12. Jumper Location for IRIG-B through Rear RS-232 Connector (3U)

MAJOR

-

+

MINOR

-

+

V.35X.21

RS-449

1PPS

IRIG-B

GPS

ETHERNET

5

RS-485

MOD BUSDNP

6

2

3

1

4

SYSTEM I/O

RS-232

500420

POWER SUPPLY 1 POWER SUPPLY 2

Partial view of rear of 6U GARD

chassis showing System I/O board

System I/O board

RS-232

Connector

Loosen 2-screws and

slide out module to

access jumpers

Figure 3-13. Removing System I/O Board (6U)

Page 56: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Installation

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

3-18

J71 2

15 16

1 2J8

15 16

J101 2

1615

J5

1

A

B

J4

J13J14

SPARES

TB1

NORM

IRIGJ12

NORM

IRIGJ3

REQ'D

UNMODMOD

1 2

J11

15 16

NONE50 OHM

600 OHMTERM

NONE50 OHM

600 OHM

GROUNDEDISOLATED

J6

J9

J1

J2

RS-232

Set Jumper J12 and J3

to the IRIG-B position

Figure 3-14. Jumper Location for IRIG-B through Rear RS-232 Connector (6U)

Page 57: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Installation

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

3-19

3.8 Current Limiter Option

Use the optional current limit module with the station battery to supply and limit the current

through older carrier auxiliary relays (such as KA-4 relays). This module is located on the

inside of the chassis. When viewed from the rear locate it by the following:

- 3U chassis: on the left hand side of the frame next to the I/O System Module.

- 6U chassis: on the right hand frame below the Power Supply Board.

For terminal block designations see the diagram below.

3U Chassis

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

+SB (48 or 125VDC)

RLY+

RLY-

1 Amp

200 mA

180 mA

20 mA

6U Chassis

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

+SB (48 or 125VDC)

RLY+

RLY-

1 Amp

200 mA

180 mA

20 mA

3U Chassis Rear

6U Chassis Rear

Power Supply

Power Supply

5K

500

56

+SB

RLY+

RLY-

1 Amp

200 mA

180 mA

20 mA

Figure 3-15. Current Limiter Terminal Block Connection

Page 58: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Installation

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

3-20

3.9 The HPS/RFL GARD Pro System Boot-Up Sequence

When the LEDs on the front panel display (SEE FIGURE 2-8) are lit the unit has booted up.

This should take less than 2 minutes. However for a more detailed description of the boot-up

process, proceed as follows.

With the front panel open do the following:

1. Verify that a boot up is in progress as displayed by the LEDs (DS1-DS4) on the

Controller Module.

PS

48/1

25V

Single Main Controller (Slot 2)Single Power Supply

Normal Disable

DS-1

DS-2 DS-4

DS-3

Figure 3-16. Location of LEDs on Controller Board

LED Purpose unlit Red Amber Green

DS-1 System Status Flashing Red is

the initial boot

sequence

Booting

continues

Solid green

means the boot

Complete

DS-2 Ethernet ports No cable NA Front port is

connected and

takes priority

Connection

through rear port

DS-3 Redundancy

Control

Not functioning,

switch in

disabled

position or On-

board fault

Light toggles

between Amber

and Green

while booting.

Redundancy

control*

DS-4 Logic Bus Logic error or

failure

NA Good

* The 3U chassis does not support redundancy, therefore this LED under a normal condition

DS-3 in a 3U cabinet should be solid green.

The complete boot-up process will take less than 2 minutes.

2. Verify the position of the Toggle Switch SW2. In the 3U chassis, SW2 should be in the

NORM position (left-front view) and not in the Disable position.

After a successful boot up, the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system is ready for interrogation through

the front or rear Ethernet Port.

Page 59: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-1

System Configuration Section 4.

4.1 Connecting a Laptop and Setting IP Addresses

The HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ system is delivered with pre-set IP addresses. The front port IP

address is fixed, and factory set to 192.168.1.1 with a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0. The rear

port IP address is configurable.

4.1.1 Front Ethernet Port

Caution:

DO NOT plug this port into a LAN. You cannot have more than one device with the same

address on a network. The front port is strictly for direct connection to a Laptop PC.

The IP Address assigned to the front port is https://192.168.1.1 for every HPS/RFL GARD Pro

system chassis. The Laptop should have an IP Address on the same subnet (192.168.1.x) as

described below. The front port has no default gateway configured, so it is not routable. This

is done for security purposes

RFL™ GARD Pro™ System

Standard Ethernet Cable

Laptop/Notebook PC

RJ-45 Ethernet PortRJ-45 Ethernet Port

IP Address: https://192.168.1.1

Figure 4-1. Front Ethernet Port

Note

All HPS/RFL GARD Pro system front Ethernet ports are preconfigured to an IP address of

192.168.1.1 at the factory, and cannot be changed.

Connect a standard Ethernet Cable from the RJ-45 Ethernet port on your PC to the front RJ-45

Ethernet port on the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system as shown above.

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is available when connecting to the front

Ethernet port on the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system with a laptop or PC. DHCP will obtain the

parameters necessary for operation in a local IP Network with the front port. This protocol

greatly reduces the system administration workload, allowing addressing setup with minimal or

no manual configuration.

Page 60: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-2

Following is a step for step procedure to configure a Laptop for DHCP using the Windows® 7

operating system. Remember that operating systems are subject to updates and can vary

slightly.

4.2 Configuring a PC Using DHCP and Static IP

4.2.1 Configuring a PC using DHCP

1. Click on the “Internet Access icon” in your desktop system tray. The example shown is

for an electrical connection; a wireless connection would be a succession of bars.

Figure 4-2. Internet Access Icon

2. Click on “Local Area Connection”

Figure 4-3. Local Area Connection

Page 61: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-3

3. Click on “Properties.”

Figure 4-4. Properties

4. Highlight “Internet Protocol Version 4” and click “Properties.”

Figure 4-5. Internet Protocol Version

Page 62: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-4

5. Select “Obtain an IP Address Automatically” and click “OK.”

Figure 4-6. Obtain an IP Address Automatically

6. Verify that DHCP is enabled and that the IP address given starts with “192.168.”

You can now logon to the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system and access the built-in web server.

4.2.2 Configuring a PC using Static IP Addresses

Instructions on setting static IP addresses are detailed below.

1. Follow the previous screens until you reach the screen above. Select “Use the

Following IP Address” and enter the IP and Subnet Mask address as shown below.

Figure 4-7. Use the Following IP Address

Page 63: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-5

2. Click “OK.”

3. Since you have changed the IP address of your PC, you will not be able to access the

network that it was previously connected to. This includes the internet. A normal side

effect of this is that the homepage your browser is configured to open on at startup will

not load successfully. To access the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system for maintenance,

enter 192.168.1.1 in the address bar.

Following are instructions on logging onto the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system web server.

4.3 First Time Login to the HPS/RFL GARD Pro System Web Server

The HPS/RFL GARD Pro system is accessed via a web browser. The following browsers are

supported: Google Chrome, Microsoft Internet Explorer and Mozilla Firefox. HPS/RFL

recommends using versions released after 2013.

1. Start the web browser on your laptop.

2. In the address bar enter the IP address of the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system which is

192.168.1.1 and hit enter.

3. The HPS/RFL GARD Pro system login page is displayed as shown below.

Username: Admin Password: Admin

Figure 4-8. First Time Login

4. The default Username and Password is “Admin”. Case sensitive.

Page 64: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-6

5. Enter “Admin” as shown above and click the Login button. The system will display the

“HPS/RFL GARD Pro system Dashboard” screen as seen in 4.3.1.

4.3.1 HPS/RFL GARD Pro System Dashboard

Shown below is the jumping off page for all PLC management functions initiated by the user

through the web GUI. This interface has been developed to make configuration,

commissioning and test as straight forward as possible for the end user. The menu bar at the

left of the screen contains all the functions necessary for system operation. A graphical

representation of the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system chassis is displayed in the main section of

the web page. You can toggle between the front and rear of the chassis, clicking on individual

modules will display their status. The system and power supply status are displayed at all times

at the top of the screen.

Clicking this view will display an enlarged

view at right. (Toggle between front and

rear views of the chassis)

Chassis alarm status

Power Supply alarm status (Main and

redundant supply) Note: if a power

supply is not present it will be grayed out.

Clicking on a module will

display its status pageMain navigation menu Physical location of

modules (slot number)

Figure 4-9. HPS/RFL GARD Pro System Dashboard

Page 65: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-7

The graphical view of the installed modules also shows the modules’ alarm state. The

following table represents alarm conditions throughout the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system:

Table 4-1 Alarm States

Alarm State Color

Normal Green

Minor Alarm Orange

Major Alarm Red

4.3.1.1 CANCEL/SAVE buttons

Cancel and Save buttons are available on configuration pages.

When user clicks on SAVE, a pop-up dialog asks for confirmation. The dialog does not show

which parameters are being changed. When cancelled in the dialog, the new values entered in

this view are still remaining, unwritten - the attempted changes are visible. This is consistent

with usage in Configure-PLC pages.

When user clicks on CANCEL in the page view, the selected values are restored to the original

state, as it existed upon entering the tab. The user remains in the page, free to navigate

elsewhere.

4.3.2 User Administration

The user “Admin” always has access to all web pages. While the “Admin” cannot be removed

as a user, only the “Admin” can access the administrator web page. Up to 11 users (including

the Admin) can be added by the administrator, with individual access levels.

4.3.2.1 Setting Access Levels (Administration)

When creating a new user the admin assigns one of the four access levels available.

Table 4-2 Setting Access Levels

User Level User Name Password Privilege

Level 3 (Admin) Admin "Default/User Selectable"

Full control when connected to the front or rear of the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system, plus can manage users.

Level 2 (full control) Selectable Full control when connected to the front or rear of the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system.

Level 1 (local control) Selectable Full control when connected to the front of the unit; read only when connected to the rear.

Level 0 (guest, read only) Selectable Read only.

Menu location: System Management > Users (Administration).

Below is an example administration dialog already populated with users at different “User

Levels”. Users can be added or deleted by the admin and each user can be individually

Page 66: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-8

password protected. Strong passwords with up to 16 characters may be used. Remember to

click “Save” once changes or additions are made.

Click directly on the pencil

image to change the

Administrator password

Click to add

users as shown

Click to change a “Guests”

password or upgrade their

privileges

Click to remove

a user

Grayed out users are

disabled

Figure 4-10. Access Levels

Page 67: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-9

4.3.2.2 Access Control

Menu location: System Management > Users (Access Control).

The following dialog will allow various security settings to be activated or set such as login fail

alarms and login lockout time. Remember to click “Save” after changes are made.

After 5 unsuccessful login attempts lockout is

activated. Check to enable and set login lockout time

(this is the time the user is locked out after failing

login), Can be set from 5 to 240 minutes.

Check to set the user session timeout (period of

inactivity before being logged out) can be set from

10 to 30 minutes in 5 minute intervals

Check to enable a system alarm

when any login is attempted. HMI

logic bit is normally factory set

Check to enable a system alarm

when a failed login is detected. HMI

logic bit is normally factory set

Figure 4-11. Access Control

Page 68: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-10

4.3.2.3 Access Log

Menu location: System Management > Users (Access Log).

The following dialog will allow viewing and printing of all login records. The web page will

show all login attempts whether successful or failed and is timestamped. The records may be

downloaded to a PC for archiving.

Click to display login records

retrieved from the GARD PLC Pro

Click to download and save

the records to a local PC

Click to delete the records

(erase them from the

physical memory)

Figure 4-12. Access Log

Page 69: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-11

4.4 File Operations

Files may be sent from a PC to the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system or saved to a PC from the

HPS/RFL GARD Pro system chassis.

Common file operations include uploading and downloading whole chassis configuration files.

4.4.1 Send File to HPS/RFL GARD Pro System

Menu location: System Management > File Operations (Send).

The “File Type” field will automatically default to “Whole Chassis Configuration.” Which is

the most common file sent to the Pro PLC. Select the type of file to be downloaded from your

PC to the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system from the drop-down menu.

Figure 4-13. Send File to HPS/RFL GARD Pro System

Once the file has been selected click the “Browse” button to navigate to the location on your PC

and then click “Send.”

The following files appear as choices in the drop-down menu:

Whole Chassis Configuration (.ZIP): This file contains all the settings for a complete

chassis. It can be loaded from a PC or the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system emulator to configure

the Pro PLC in one step.

System Logic Database (.TXT): This file defines the web pages that configure the system

logic. It must be loaded prior to a new logic (.EDN) loading.

System Logic (.EDN): This file contains the system logic.

Page 70: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-12

System Logic (.DSN): This file is the ORCAD source file that is needed to edit the logic. It is

not used by the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system, it is stored on the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system

so that it can be downloaded and edits made to the logic.

System Logic (.PDF): This file is a printable copy of the logic schematic created from the

ORCAD source file. It is stored on the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system so that it can be

downloaded and printed.

System Logic Configuration (.ZIP): This file contains the following files in a Zip format:

System Logic Database (.TXT), System Logic (.EDN), System Logic (.DSN), System Logic

(.PDF).

Chassis Drawing (.PDF): This file contains HPS/RFL GARD Pro system layout and

application drawings specific to each customer.

System Logic Firmware (.HEX): This is the operating software for the logic processor. This

file is only loaded when there is a system upgrade.

PLC Firmware Software (.ZIP): The following files are the operating software files for the

PLC module. All three files are included in the PLC Firmware Software .zip file. They are all

needed when the module is updated.

PLC Processor Software (.S19)

PLC DSP Software (.S19)

PLC Forth Software (.S19)

Page 71: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-13

4.4.2 Save File to your PC

Menu location: System Management > File Operations (Save).

The “File Type” field will automatically default to “Whole Chassis Configuration” which is the

most common file to be saved to a PC. Select the type of file to be saved to your PC from the

drop-down menu. The default file name is “allconfigs.zip.” Rename the file as needed.

Figure 4-14. Save File to PC

Once the file has been selected click the “Generate File” button to navigate to the location on

your PC for the file and then click “Save File to PC.”

The following files appear as choices in the drop-down menu:

Whole Chassis Configuration (.ZIP): This file contains all the settings for a complete

chassis. It can be saved to your PC for archiving.

System Logic (.EDN): This file contains the system logic. It may be saved to a PC and loaded

to other HPS/RFL GARD Pro system units.

System Logic (.DSN): This file is the ORCAD source file that is needed to edit the logic. It is

not used by the Pro PLC, merely stored on it so that it can be saved to a PC for editing.

System Logic (.PDF): This file is a viewable/printable copy of the logic schematic created

from the ORCAD source file. It is not used by the Pro PLC, merely stored on it so that it can be

saved to a PC and viewed or printed with Adobe Acrobat.

Page 72: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-14

System Logic Configuration (.ZIP): This file contains the proceeding three files plus the

configuration logic files (.JSON) in a Zip format.

Chassis Drawing (.PDF): This file contains HPS/RFL GARD Pro system layout and

application drawings specific to each customer.

System Manual (.PDF): This is the System Manual for the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system. It

may be saved to a PC and viewed with Adobe Acrobat Reader.

Extracted Configuration (.JSON): This file contains user readable settings for each module

in the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system.

Extracted Configuration Viewer (.ZIP): This contains an HTML file which is used to view

the Extracted Configuration file.

Extracted Configuration Compare (.ZIP): This contains an HTML file which is used to

compare two different Extracted Configuration files and observe differences between them.

User Access Log Records (.CSV): This timestamped record will show all login attempts

whether successful or failed.

SNMP Trap MIB Database (.MIB): This file contains the SNMP MIB specifying the format

and details regarding published SNMP traps.

SNMP Agent MIB Database (.ZIP): The zip file contains two MIBs:

1) RFL-GARDPRO-MIB.mib: Management information for GARD Pro.

2) RFL-GARDPRO-CARD.mib: A sub-module of the RFL-GARDPRO-MIB for

functional cards.

Inventory/Revision Report (HTML): This file contains a report of all modules installed in

the unit and their revisions.

SOE Report (ZIP): This file contains both the .CSV and HTML format files of the current

complete SOE record.

DNP Profile (CSV): This file contains the device’s DNP profile including configured DNP

points and associated parameters.

Developer Log (ZIP): For factory use only.

Page 73: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-15

4.5 Web/SCP Server

The HPS/RFL GARD Pro system has three User Interface communication ports; a front RJ-45

Ethernet port, a rear RS-232 port, and a rear RJ-45 (electrical or optical) Ethernet port. Field

upgrades to the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system are normally done utilizing the on-board secure

FTP/SCP Web Server.

Note:

Field upgrades must be done through the front Ethernet port.

The rear RS-232 port is for HPS/RFL use only.

Menu location: System Management > Web/SCP

The Web/SCP Server Configuration page is shown below followed by a detailed description of

the various options.

1 2 3

4 5Active when “RFL Self

Signed” is selected above

Active when “Custom”

is selected above

Figure 4-15. Web/SCP Server

1. SCP Server: This will enable or disable the Secure Copy Protocol server on the

HPS/RFL GARD Pro system front Ethernet port. This is disabled by default, and is

disabled after every power-cycle or reboot of the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system

controller module regardless of the setting.

Page 74: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-16

Note:

Enabling the SCP server will only last until the controller reboots. Before a field

upgrade is possible the SCP server must be enabled, it will be disabled during the

upgrade process since power cycling is required.

2. HTTP/HTTPS: The HPS/RFL GARD Pro system web server can be configured to use

either hypertext transfer protocol (HTTP) or https over a secure sockets layer (HTTPS),

HTTP is the default. When using HTTP without a secure sockets layer the entire web

page and form content is sent in clear text. Passwords and usernames are obscured to

prevent the casual user from seeing them in packet captures, but this is by no means

secure. When using https all traffic between the browser and server is encrypted.

The server on the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system may be configured to listen to HTTP

requests on the front port. The rear port must be https and the front port can be either.

The option to listen to none or turn off the server is available only for the rear port. The

front port must be configured for at least one protocol.

3. HTTPS Certificate/Key Pair: In order to perform the security tasks involved the

HPS/RFL GARD Pro system needs a certificate file and private key file, both of which

must be PEM (Privately Enhanced Mail) encoded. The unit comes with an HPS/RFL

self-signed certificate. You may choose between using the built in certificate and key or

a custom certificate and key that you upload.

Table 4-3 Security Levels

Method Pros Cons

HTTP Simple to use. Insecure.

HTTPS with HPS/RFL Cert.

Secure.

User must remember to use HTTPS instead of just an IP address in the address bar of the browser. Private key is the same for all HPS/RFL GARD Pro system browsers and therefore may be considered compromised.

HTTPS with custom Cert.

Most secure. User must remember to use HTTPS instead of just an IP address in the address bar of the browser. User has to generate his/her own certificate and key pair.

When using the HPS/RFL self-signed certificate the browser will not trust the signing

certificate authority by default, and will therefore indicate a problem with the certificate.

You may bypass this warning and force the browser to continue, but if you do so you

will have to do it again next time you log in. The user should set up the browser to trust

the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system certificate authority. To do this, follow the appropriate

procedure based on your browser.

For Internet Explorer (page down for Chrome or Firefox)

4. Download Certificates (Active when “RFL Self Signed” is selected)

a. Click on the link to the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system certificate authority certificate as

shown at the bottom left of the web page.

Page 75: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-17

b. When asked what to do – click on Open.

c. The Certificate Import Wizard should appear – click on Next.

d. When prompted for a file name click on Next since the Wizard will have used the file

name just downloaded from the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system.

e. The next dialog box prompts for a password – leave empty and leave all boxes

unchecked, click on Next.

f. The next dialog box offers to automatically select the certificate store, which you

should not do. Click on the option to put the certificate in a particular store and then

select the Trusted Root Certification Authority Store – click on Next.

g. Click on Finish.

Your browser will now trust all HPS/RFL GARD Pro system web servers that are

using HPS/RFL’s self-signed certificate. To prevent more warning messages in IE

about the certificate, disable the warning about certificate mismatch. The option is in

Tools > Internet Options > Advanced > Settings > Security.

For Chrome

4. Download Certificates (Active when “RFL Self Signed” is selected)

a. Click on the link to the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system certificate authority certificate as

shown at the bottom left of the web page.

b. When asked what to do – click on Save.

c. Go to the download folders and double click on the imported certificate.

d. A Certificate Wizard will open. When prompted for a file name click on Next since

the Wizard will have used the file name just downloaded from the HPS/RFL GARD

Pro system.

e. The next dialog box prompts for a password – leave empty and leave all boxes

unchecked, click on Next.

f. The next dialog box offers to automatically select the certificate store, which you

should not do. Click on the option to put the certificate in a particular store and then

select the Trusted Root Certification Authority Store – click on Next.

g. You will be asked to complete the Certificate Import. Click on Finish

Your Chrome browser will now trust all HPS/RFL GARD Pro system web servers that

are using HPS/RFL’s self-signed certificate. To prevent more warning messages in

Page 76: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-18

Chrome about the certificate, disable the warning about certificate mismatch. The

option is in Tools > Internet Options > Settings > HTTPS/SSL > Manage Certificates.

For Firefox

4. Download Certificates (Active when “RFL Self Signed” is selected)

a. Click on the link to the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system certificate authority certificate as

shown at the bottom left of the web page.

b. When asked what to do – click on Save.

c. Click on Tools > Options. In the Advanced Section select the Encryption tab.

d. Click on View Certificates, Firefox’s Certificate Manager should appear.

e. Click on the Authorities tab, click on the Import Button.

f. Select the file that you saved. You are then prompted to select what to trust this

certificate for – select the option to identify web sites.

g. Click OK until you are out of the Options Dialog.

Firefox will still warn you about certificate address mismatches. There are third party

plug-ins for Firefox to prevent this such as “Remember Mismatched Domains.”

5. Using a Custom Certificate (Active when “Custom” is selected)

The user requires the generation of a certificate and key. This task is best left to your

IT department, since significant knowledge concerning SSL certificates and signing is

required. Once the files are generated they can be uploaded using the Web Server

Administration Page. Installing the certificate is a one-time operation.

Page 77: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-19

4.6 Inventory and Software Information

As shown below, information on how the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system chassis is provisioned

can be accessed at any time from the main menu by clicking the “Download” button.

Menu location: System Management > Inventory & Version Info.

Click to download a detailed report

of all installed software and

revision information

Click to refresh

the information

An inventory of the PLC Pro chassis

is displayed including power supplies.

Current installed

logic files are listed

Figure 4-16. Inventory and Version Control

Page 78: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-20

4.7 Dynamic Menu Feature

Certain items on the sidebar menu are dynamic in nature as shown below. Clicking the listing

with the “+” next to it in this example will reveal the type of PLC modules installed in the

HPS/RFL GARD Pro system with their slot location. You can then select the module to be

configured.

Note:

The module description will also appear in a dropdown menu at the top of the web page.

Clicking the listing with the “+” symbol will reveal the type of PLC modules installed in the GARD Pro along with their slot location

Then select the module to

be configured

1

2

Figure 4-17. Dynamic Menu Feature

Page 79: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-21

4.8 Changing Settings – General Information

When making changes to the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system configuration web pages the

following convention is used in the field:

- Green: value is in range allowed

- Red: value is outside the range allowed

New setting

Will show green if within

acceptable range

Moving the cursor over the

question mark symbol will

display details on the setting

The field will display red if outside of the acceptable

range with an error message as shown

Error message

Figure 4-18. Settings, General Information

Remember to save any changes that are made before exiting the web page.

4.9 Input/Output Module

The I/O card has several options for I/O

(6) Inputs (input voltage is jumper-selectable)

(6) Relay Outputs (Form A or Form B, jumper selectable)

(6) Solid-State Outputs (no options)

Details on each input and output module continue on the following pages.

CAUTION Electro Static Discharge (ESD)

This equipment contains static sensitive devices. Persons working on this equipment must

observe electro static discharge (ESD) precautions before opening the unit or working on the

rear of the chassis. As a minimum you must do the following: Use anti-static devices such as

wrist straps and floor mats.

Page 80: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-22

4.9.1 Removing Input/Output Module

Input/Output Module

Insert Extraction

Tool here

Extraction

Tool

Remove ScrewRemove Screw

Figure 4-19. Removing Input/Output Module

Ensure that the power switch(es) is in the OFF position and that power is disconnected at its

source. To remove the Input/Output Module remove the two screws shown above. Screw in

the extraction tool where shown and using the tool gently slide the module out.

Page 81: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-23

4.9.2 Setting Jumpers on the Input Unit

Note:

The following illustrations have the RF Shield removed for clarity.

Input voltage can be set as shown below.

J12 J11 J10 J9 J8 J7

24

V

24V

24

V

24V

24

V

24

V4

8V

48

V

48V

48V

48

V

48V

12

5V

12

5V

12

5V

12

5V

12

5V

12

5V

25

0V

25

0V

25

0V

25

0V

25

0V

25

0V

24

V

J7

48V

12

5V

25

0V

Jumper Setting

(typical)

with 48V

selected

Figure 4-20. Setting Jumpers on the Input Unit

Page 82: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-24

4.9.3 Setting Switches on the Relay Output Unit

The relay output can be changed as shown below.

SW1SW2SW3SW4SW5SW6

K1K2K3K4K5K6

A

B

AAA

BBB B B

A ASlide the switch to move

from Form A (normally

open) to Form B

(normally closed)

FO

RM

AF

OR

M

B

SW

1

Switch Setting (typical)

Slider Switches

Figure 4-21. Setting Switches on the Relay Output Unit

4.9.4 Input/Output Module Status, Configuration and Test

Solid-state outputs, relay outputs and input modules are equipped in sets of 6, with 2 modules

on each base board occupying 1 slot. Ten rear slots are available in the 6U version and 4 rear

slots are available in the 3U version Inputs and outputs may have a system logic timer

associated with them that has settings for both pick-up delay and drop-out delay. When

configuring inputs and outputs, slots that are populated will show in the side-bar menu. Select

which slot you wish to configure.

Note:

See 2.4 GARD PRO SYSTEM SLOT LOCATION AND MODULE Description for information on

the slot availability.

Page 83: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-25

4.9.4.1 Input/Output Module Status

Menu location: Status > I/O.

The following web page shows the status of all I/O cards in the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system.

It is updated dynamically.

Type and location of card

with its alarm status

Description of inputs and

outputs as programmed on

the Configuration page

Terminal block number of the

input or output functionState of the

Input/output

Indicates the Channel

Number on the input or

output module

Click to expand

the card

information

Figure 4-22. I/O Status

Page 84: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-26

4.9.4.2 Input Configuration

Menu location: Configuration > Inputs (General).

The example web page below shows a typical label description list for Input 1 through 6 on the

I/O module. Once all the fields have been filled-in click the “Save” button to make the labels

permanent.

General tabSlot and location Click to enable module

Enter label

namesClick “Save” once the entries

are complete

Figure 4-23. Configuring Inputs

Page 85: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-27

4.9.4.3 Input Mapping Configuration

Menu location: Configuration > Inputs (Mapping).

Inputs can be mapped to different points in the logic. Input mapping choices are set up in the

system logic. The system logic provides a series of choices for mapping physical inputs to

various points programmed in the system logic. The physical inputs may also be configured in

the Logic Configuration section. An example input mapping screen is shown below.

Mapping tab Dropdown menu for mapping

False: Disables the logical functionTrue: The function is always active

Figure 4-24. Input Mapping

Page 86: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-28

4.9.4.4 Input Advanced Configuration

Menu location: Configuration > Inputs (Advanced).

The following setting should not be changed by the user.

Advanced tabSee below

Figure 4-25. Inputs Advanced Configuration

Logic Start Bit: This value can be obtained from the logic diagram and will establish

the index of the first bit where the module will place its output on the logic bus (3-505).

Page 87: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-29

4.9.4.5 Input Test

Menu location: Test > Inputs. Select the input to be tested.

The following web page verifies the correct function of the relay inputs.

1 2 3 4

56Represents the Input

Number of the I/O module

Description of inputs as

entered on the Label Enable

Configuration webpage

Figure 4-26. Input Test

1. TB#/State: Indicates the terminal block number of the input function and whether

voltage is applied to the input terminals. This can be thought of as ‘before’ the logic bit

associated with the input. This field is updated dynamically.

2. Logic State: Indicates the state of the logic bit associated with the input. This can be

thought of as ‘after’ the terminal block state. This field is updated dynamically.

3. Action: This drop-down menu will allow the tester to set the inputs to the following

modes:

Normal: This is the normal operating condition for the input. The input status is

placed on the logic bus.

Hold: This will lock the input to its current state.

Off/On: Sets the input logic state to 0/1 independent of the terminal block state.

Page 88: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-30

The inputs mode will only change after the “Execute Action” button has been pressed.

The module will issue a minor alarm if any input function is set to anything other than

normal.

4. Test State: Indicates the mode of the function. The mode does not change until the

user presses “Execute Action”. The “Test State” column indicates the present mode of

the function. After the user presses the “Execute Action” button the column indicates

the mode that the function has changed to. The lettering of the field changes to orange

for any function that is not in normal mode.

5. Set All to Normal: Returns the mode of all the input functions to normal operation.

Normal operation will place the state of the input onto the logic bus. This function will

be used to return the module to normal operating conditions after performing tests that

require changes to the input mode.

6. Execute Action: When the “Execute Action” button is pressed the state of the 6 input

functions will be changed to the state specified in the “Action” column.

Page 89: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-31

4.9.4.6 Output Configuration

Menu location: Configuration > Outputs (General).

The example web page below shows a typical label description list for Output 1 through 6 on

the I/O module. Once all the fields have been filled-in click the “Save” button to make the

labels permanent.

General tabSlot and location Click to enable module

Enter label names Click “Save” once the entries are complete

Figure 4-27. Output Configuration

Page 90: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-32

4.9.4.7 Output Mapping Configuration

Menu location: Configuration > Output (Mapping).

Some typical output mapping choices are described below the web page example. Output

mapping choices are set-up in the system logic. The system logic provides a series of choices

for mapping various points programmed in the system logic to physical outputs. The output

mapping may also be configured in the Logic Configuration section.

Mapping tab Dropdown menu for mappingSee below

Figure 4-28. Output Mapping

Not Used: If a hardware output is mapped to “NOT USED,” the hardware output will

not be tied to the logic, and will not operate under any situation.

Page 91: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-33

4.9.4.8 Output Advanced Configuration

Menu location: Configuration > Outputs (Advanced).

CAUTION

Inaccurate settings could cause service disruption.

The following setting should not be changed by the user.

Advanced tabSee below

Figure 4-29. Output Advanced Configuration

Logic Start Bit: This value can be obtained from the logic diagram and will establish

the index of the first bit where the module will read its input from the logic bus (3-505).

Page 92: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-34

4.9.4.9 Output Test

Menu location: Test > Outputs. Select the output to be tested. The following web page is used to verify the correct function of the relay outputs.

1 2 3 4

56Represents the Output

number of the I/O moduleDescription of outputs as entered on the

Label Enable Configuration webpage

Figure 4-30. Output Test

1. TB#/State: Indicates the terminal block number of the output function and whether the

output is activated. This can be thought of as ‘after’ the logic bit associated with the

output. The field is updated dynamically.

2. Logic State: Indicates the state of the logic bit associated with the output. This can be

thought of as ‘before’ the terminal block state. This field is updated dynamically.

3. Action: This drop-down menu allows the tester to set the outputs to the following

modes:

Normal: This is the normal operating condition for the output. The logic bus drives

the output.

Hold: This will lock the output to the state of the output when the test is executed.

Off: Sets the output to a low state (0), independent of the status of the logic bit.

An output that is set for a normally closed contact will close.

An output that is set as a normally open contact will open.

See Section 3.6 for further details.

On: Sets the output to a high state (1), independent of the status of the logic bit.

An output that is set for a normally closed contact will open.

An output that is set as a normally open contact will close.

See Section 3.6 for further details.

Page 93: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-35

The inputs mode will only change after the “Execute Action” button has been pressed.

The module will issue a minor alarm if any input function is set to anything other than

normal.

4. Test State: Indicates the mode of the function. The “Test State” column indicates the

present mode of the function. After the users press the “Execute Action” button the

column indicates the mode that the function has changed to. The lettering of the field

will change to orange for any function that is not in normal mode.

5. Set All to Normal: Returns the mode of all the output functions to normal operation.

Normal operation will result in the output being driven by the logic bus. This function

will be used to return the module to normal operating conditions after performing tests

that require changes to the output mode.

6. Execute Action: When the “Execute Action” button is pressed the state of the 6 output

functions will be changed to the state specified in the “Action” column.

Page 94: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-36

4.10 Front Panel LED Status and Configuration

The HPS/RFL GARD Pro system has 40 programmable LEDs. 20 Physical LEDs located on

the Front Panel, and an additional 20 virtual LEDs for display on the optional Front Panel

Touch Screen Display or from the User Interface. Both physical and virtual LEDs can be

configured to indicate states of the system. The physical and virtual LEDs are normally factory

set, but can be customized by the user through the GUI. An example status screen is shown

below followed by details on configuring the LEDs.

4.10.1 LED Status

Menu location: Status > LEDs >Front Panel LED’S (1-20) / Virtual LED’s (21-40).

It should be noted that the front panel LEDs can be programmed to illuminate green, orange or

red. These colors can be assigned by the user to indicate various status conditions.

Status of the LEDs Global label Status label of the LEDStatus of the

LED

Figure 4-31. LED Status

4.10.2 LED Configuration

Menu location: Configuration > LEDs.

The following web page is used to program the LEDs. Each LED can be assigned a “Global”

label and each color can be assigned a different label in the drop-down dialog box shown

below. The description column in this dialog will indicate the state of the LED with its

Page 95: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-37

assigned color. The control logic in the next column can be set as required by the user with its

associated logic bit that can be driven either high or low. Once all the changes are made click

“Save” to make the changes permanent. A confirmation window will appear at the bottom right

of the web page.

Note: Virtual LED’s are provided for viewing on the optional touch screen display.

Set the global LED label first

by typing directly in the field

1 2 3 4 5

Figure 4-32. LED Configuration

1. LED: Indicates the LED color in descending priority.

2. Description: The LED active state. In the example shown the LED will turn red when

“HMIOUT Bit 7” is high.

If multiple conditions are true, the LEDs will be displayed with the following priorities.

Table 4-4 LED Priorites

None Highest

Red

Amber

Green Lowest

3. HMI/Logic: This drop-down menu will allow the user to set the control logic to the

following:

None

Logic

HmiIn

Page 96: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-38

HmiOut

4. Logic Bit: The bit range is between 3 and 511 inclusive for logic bits and 1 and 63

inclusive for HMI bits.

5. Active: Selects the logic bit state that will make the LED color active.

4.11 System Alarms Status and Configuration

The modules in the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system continually perform self-diagnostics. For

different conditions a module may issue either a major or minor alarm. An example status

screen is shown below followed by details on configuring the system alarms.

4.11.1 System Alarm Status

Menu location: Status > Alarms.

Clicking directly on these buttons will link

to the status page for the module

1 32 4 5

Figure 4-33. Alarm Status

General:

Page 97: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-39

1. Inventory Mismatch: The alarm will become active when a module is removed from,

or moved to a different slot in the chassis or inserted into a vacant slot. The alarm will

also become active if the module is not responding on the control bus. If the card is

returned to the chassis in the same slot the alarm will clear automatically within one

minute. Pressing “Reset” will record the current inventory and reset the alarm.

There is a four minute delay before a module drops out of inventory. Cards are added to

inventory almost instantly.

Note:

An SOE entry is made if an inventory mismatch alarm occurs.

2. System Clock: Alarm will become active if the expected clock source is not healthy.

See Configuration > System > Clock Tab

3. Power Supply Alarm: The alarm goes active when a power supply output voltage is

measured to be outside of the acceptable range.

Internal:

4. Logic Bus Error: Alarm will become active if a problem or conflict is detected on the

logic bus. Always review the logic configuration to ensure that no bits are being driven

by more than one source.

CAUTION

This is a serious alarm, contact HPS/RFL for assistance.

5. System Bus Error: Goes active when unexpected messages are detected on the control

bus. The alarm will stay active until manually cleared by pressing “Reset.”

CAUTION

This is a serious alarm, contact HPS/RFL for assistance.

4.11.2 System Alarm Configuration

Menu location: Configuration > Alarms.

The following web page is used to set system alarm levels in the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system.

The alarm configuration web page lists each module in a HPS/RFL GARD Pro system and

allows mapping of the modules alarm state to the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system alarm contacts.

On this web page the user can map any module alarm to activate the HPS/RFL GARD Pro

system

- major alarm,

- minor alarm,

- both major and minor alarms or

- no alarms.

Under normal operating conditions when the alarm conditions are healthy the relays are

energized. In an alarm or alert state the relays will be in the de-energized position.

Note:

All relay contacts are labeled in the de-energized position.

Page 98: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-40

1 23 4 5 6

Figure 4-34. Alarm Configuration

1. Major Alarm – Pickup Delay: Once an abnormal condition is detected, as

programmed in the alarm configurations below, the pickup timer can be set to delay the

major alarm indication from 0 to 30 seconds in 125ms increments.

2. Major Alarm – Dropout Delay: Once an abnormal condition ceases, the dropout timer

can be set to delay the ending of the major alarm indication from 0 to 30 seconds in

125ms increments.

3. Minor Alarm – Pickup Delay: Once an abnormal condition is detected, as

programmed in the alarm configurations below, the pickup timer can be set to delay the

minor alarm indication from 0 to 30 seconds in 125ms increments.

4. Minor Alarm – Dropout Delay: Once an abnormal condition ceases, the dropout timer

can be set to delay the ending of the minor alarm indication from 0 to 30 seconds in

125ms increments.

5. General System Alarms: These alarms can be set to activate the HPS/RFL GARD Pro

system major alarm, minor alarm, both alarms (major and minor) and no alarms as

required.

6. Internal Alarms: Contact HPS/RFL Service before changing these settings, normally

for HPS/RFL service use only.

Page 99: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-41

Please note that the alarms as shown in the GUI will not use the delay settings, the alarm

contacts on the rear of the chassis will use these settings only.

4.12 SOE Status and Configuration

A Recording of every “Sequence of Event” can be downloaded and saved. The SOE log is

stored in the GARD in non-volatile RAM. Currently 609 events can be stored in the HPS/RFL

GARD Pro system database.

4.12.1 Retrieving SOE Records

Menu location: Status > SOE > Records.

The following web page will display.

1 32 4 5 6 7

Figure 4-35. Retrieving SOE Records

1. Last Updated: Gives the date and time of the last update of the SOE display.

2. Record #: The number of the record which corresponds to the timestamp. Clicking to

the left of the number will display trigger details for this record. See the following web

page.

3. Date Time: Gives the date and time the SOE was logged. The time is given in hours,

minutes, seconds and milliseconds.

Page 100: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-42

4. Scroll Bar: Slide this bar to select the range of the SOE display. This allows selection

of only one date or window of time, as needed. The date and time of the displayed SOE

will display below the scroll bar.

5. Trigger Label: The description of the SOE trigger, as programed in the configuration

web page.

6. Status: When the trigger changes to this state it generates the SOE record. In the

example, record 1 shows that Trigger 10, Rx low level, changed from high to low, thus

generating the SOE record.

7. Reload, Download and Clear All buttons: Click the “Reload” button to refresh the

SOE display. Click the “Download” button to save the web page to your computer.

Click the “Clear All” button to clear all SOE records from the database.

Page 101: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-43

4.12.1.1 SOE Record Details (Triggers)

After selecting the “›” button the page moves the user from the Reports tab to the Details tab.

The user can then navigate to the next record by returning to the Reports tab or clicking Older

or Newer on the Details tab.

For example, clicking the “›” symbol next to SOE record # 1 will display the details page for

record #1. This contains the state of all currently enabled SOE triggers at the instant the record

was generated. There are a total of 191 triggers that can be enabled for recording.

The screenshot below shows that trigger #10 has changed state, generating an SOE record.

Note:

A trigger that changes state will show as red text with a light red background.

State

The record

being viewed

Trigger

Number

Changed state will be

highlighted in red if changedTrigger

Label

Figure 4-36. SOE Triggers

Selecting the Older or Newer buttons moves the user to the next record.

Page 102: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-44

4.12.1.2 SOE Records Details (Logic Bits)

Menu location: Status > SOE > (Logic Labels).

This web page shows the state of all system logic bits at the instant the SOE record was

generated. Mostly used by HPS/RFL Service for event analysis.

Logic bit label as defined in the

logic bit labels name pageBit Number

Shows the status of each logic bit

at the time of the event

Figure 4-37. SOE Record Details (Logic Bits)

Page 103: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-45

4.12.1.3 SOE Records Details (Logic Table)

Menu location: Status > SOE > Details (Logic Table).

This web page contains the same data as the logic bit list, but presents it in table format.

Mostly used by HPS/RFL Service for event analysis.

Selecting the Older or Newer buttons moves the user to the next record.

In the example shown the status of the bits 8 through

15 are 00000010

Figure 4-38. SOE Record Details (Logic Table)

Page 104: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-46

4.12.2 SOE Counters

This “Read Only” web page will inform the user of the count of enabled triggers. The count

can be reset by clicking the “Reset’ button.

Menu location: Status > SOE > Counters.

1 2 3 4

Figure 4-39. SOE Counters

1. Trigger Number: The trigger number column identifies the trigger number used in the

custom logic file. The first two numbers are reserved by the HPS/RFL GARD Pro

system and cannot be assigned or changed by the user.

2. Label: Label for each of the triggers.

3. Count: Count for the enabled trigger.

4. Reset Counters: Resets the counters.

Page 105: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-47

4.12.3 SOE Configuration (Triggers and Labels)

Menu location: Configuration > SOE

The following web page will allow the user to enable SOE triggers and assign trigger labels that

will be displayed in the SOE record. SOE triggers are defined in the system logic.

1 32

Figure 4-40. SOE Configuration

1. Trigger #: The SOE recorder has 191 user programmable SOE triggers. The trigger #

column identifies the trigger number used in the custom logic file.

2. Trigger Label: User definable label for each of the 191 triggers. Change this field by

changing the text and selecting “Save” once all the changes are made to the web page.

3. Enabled: Check this box to enable the trigger.

4.13 Logic Configuration

Menu location: Configuration > Logic

Input and output mapping can also be performed in section 4.9.4.3 and 4.9.4.7 respectively.

Please refer to these sections for details on I/O input and output mapping. The example web

page below has the “Options” tab clicked.

4.13.1 Logic Options

To allow flexibility in the logic without modifying the logic programming, an options setting

section is provided. Option setting choices are defined in the system logic. In the following

Page 106: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-48

web page example various logic options can be enabled or disabled or set, such as polarity, and

shift direction.

Go to Section 4.9.4.3 for Input Mapping

Go to Section 4.9.4.7 for Output Mapping

Remember to click “Save” for the

settings to become permanent

Figure 4-41. Logic Options

Page 107: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-49

4.13.2 Logic Timers

Menu location: Configuration > Logic (Logic Timers).

The available timers are dependent on the system logic files loaded into the HPS/RFL GARD

Pro system. Timer settings are from 0 to 32767ms in 0.25ms increments.

Timer settings

Remember to click “Save” for the

settings to become permanent

Figure 4-42. Logic Configuration, Timers

Page 108: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-50

4.14 System Settings

Menu location: Configuration > System (Labels/Ethernet).

4.14.1 General Information and IP details

This web page can be used to identify the complete HPS/RFL GARD Pro system, for example

the substation name. Additional identifiers can be added as required. Also listed here is IP

address information normally only changed by the system administrator.

Enter label information

here as required

1 2 3 45 6 7

Time since last

power cycle or reboot

89

Figure 4-43. System Configuration, Ethernet Labels

1. Active Port: Displays which of the two Ethernet ports, front or back is active.

2. Rear IP Address: Displays the current IP address for the rear Ethernet port. For

additional security the user must be connected to the front Ethernet port and have the

proper security access level authorization to change the address of the rear Ethernet port.

When connected to the front Ethernet port, enter the desired address and click “Save.”

3. Rear Netmask: Indicates the subnet mask of the rear port. The administrator who

assigns the IP address will also assign the netmask. All systems on the same subnet

must use the same subnet mask.

4. Rear Gateway: Displays the rear gateway IP address for the corresponding Ethernet

port.

5. Front IP Address: Displays the IP address of the front Ethernet port. This address is

programmed at the factory and cannot be changed.

Page 109: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-51

6. Front Netmask: Displays the subnet mask of the front Ethernet port. The subnet mask

is programmed at the factory and cannot be changed.

7. Front Gateway: Displays the front gateway IP address for the corresponding Ethernet

port (factory set).

8. Chassis Identification Number: HPS/RFL assigned number identifying the hardware

configuration. User changeable in case of hardware reconfiguration.

9. Chassis Serial Number: HPS/RFL assigned serial number unique to an assembled

chassis. The Serial number can also be found on the side of the chassis. User

changeable in case of controller hardware being replaced.

4.14.2 System Settings – Clock

Menu location: Configuration > System (Clock).

This web page is used to select the RTC (real time clock) and manipulate the date and time if

required. On boot-up the web page will display whatever the RTC is programmed to. The date

and time will be grayed out in the web page when an external clock source is synchronized.

Remember to click “Save” to make the changes permanent.

1 2 3

4 5 6

Figure 4-44. System Configuration, Clock

1. Date: Displays the local date and time with offset from GMT.

2. Time: Time setting field.

3. Date Setting Utility: Can be set to a specific date, set to “Today” or cleared.

4. Time Zone Offset: When using GPS, sets the time offset from +12 to -12 hours.

Page 110: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-52

5. Source of System Clock Alarm: Sets the expected timing source for alarm purposes,

set to “None” if no external timing source is used. The choices are:

None

GPS

IRIG-B

IRIG-B/1pps (one pulse per second)

6. Clock Source: Indicates the clock source and its state.

4.15 Advanced Settings

The following web pages are normally used for factory programming and troubleshooting only.

CAUTION

Improper settings can cause system outage

Only advanced users should access these pages which are used to program labels for the

HPS/RFL GARD Pro system “logic bits” and “HMI bits.”

4.15.1 Logic Bits

Menu location: Advanced > Logic Bits.

This table can be scrolled down through values from 3 to 511. Note the first three bits are

reserved for use by the system and cannot be changed. Remember to click “Save” once

changes are made.

The user can enter label information here. This information will also show on the “Logic Details” for SOE records web page. .Logic Bit Number

Logic Bits reserved by

the system

Shows the state of a

particular logic bit

number for that row

Figure 4-45. Advanced Settings, Logic Bits

Page 111: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-53

4.15.2 HMI Bits

Menu location: Advanced > HMI Bits.

This table can be scrolled down through values from 2 to 63. There are two tabs; one for “HMI

In” and one for “HMI Out”. The “HMI In” web page is shown below and the “HMI Out” page

is similar.

Note

The first two bits are reserved for use by the system and cannot be changed.

HMI Bits reserved

by the systemHMI Bit Number

The user can enter

label information here

Shows the state of a

particular HMI bit number

for that row

Figure 4-46. Advanced Settings, HMI Bits

Page 112: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-54

4.15.3 Touch Screen Display Wake-up

From the pull down menu on your PC select “Settings/Advanced/Touch Screen Display”

Page 113: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-55

The TSD can Wake-Up to a designated screen. With a Laptop or PC connected to the GARD

chassis select Advanced/Touch Screen Display. A designated wake-up HMIOUT bit can be set

high to display the required screen; bits 2 – 63 are available, bits 0 and 1 are reserved. To

designate the wake-up bit:

1. Set the bit in the “Wake-up HMIOUT Bit” drop down menu.

2. Select the “Wakeup Page”

3. Click “Save”

Figure 4-47. TSD Wake-Up Settings

Page 114: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-56

4.15.4 TSD push button interface configuration

The following sub-section gives details on configuring the Push Button Interface.

The following web page will appear. This web page will allow the user to configure which

input bits appear on the “Push Button Interface.” Up to 8 Push Buttons can be configured.

Click “Save” after configuring the web page.

Sets the title of the buttons that will be seen on the TSD (15 Character Limit)

Selects the number of HMI "In Bits" that are to be manipulated on the "Push Button Interface", selecting enables the remaining options

When + Icon is selected the Push Button color options and preview window will open.

Sets the TYPE of button (Toggle or Pulse)

Check to enable Button

on Touch Screen Display

Figure 4-48. TSD Push Button Interface Configuration.

Page 115: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-57

Table 4-5. TSD Push Button Interface fields

Field Description Values

PB # The number associated with the Push Button. 1-8 read only

HMI IN BIT Number of the HMI IN bit. 2-61

DESCRIPTION Label provided by the user.

BUTTON TYPE “Toggle” or “Pulse” depending on the needs

of the button. “Toggle” switches between

values on and off while “Pulse” momentarily

turns the switch on.

Pulse, Toggle

ENABLE If enabled the switch Is present in the display. Enable, disable

“On” Text* The text desired for the display of the “On”

value.

1-4 character string

“On” Color* The color desired for the display of the “On”

value. The text is made black or white to

create the highest contrast.

Green, Silver, Black, White,

Red, Lime, Yellow, Blue

“On” Preview* Preview of the appearance of the “On” button

showing the text and the color chosen.

Display only

“Off” Text* The text desired for the display of the “Off”

value.

1-4 character string

“Off” Color* The color desired for the display of the “Off”

value. The text is made black or white to

create the highest contrast.

Green, Silver, Black, White,

Red, Lime, Yellow, Blue

“Off” Preview* Preview of the appearance of the “Off” button

showing the text and the color chosen.

Display only

If buttons are not enabled on the

configuration web page they will not

appear here

Current state

has Black

border

Color set on the

configuration web page

Push Button Label Text

set on Advanced/TSD

Settings web page

A single button appears if button

type is set to pulse on the Push

Button Interface Configuration web

page. When this “Pulse” button is

pressed and confirmed the HMI bit

will be set high and then low, acting

like a momentary push button.

OFF 0

Breaker 12

ON 1

ON 2 OFF2

Breaker 22

OFF 1ON1

ON 4

ON 6

ON 3 OFF3

OFF4 ON 5

Reset

Mod 12 Mod 22

OFF5

OFF6

Description 5 Description 6

Description 7 Description 8

Figure 4-49. TSD Push Button Interface.

Page 116: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-58

If a Push Button Interface web page is not configured (i.e. Some or No Buttons are enabled)

the TSD will automatically display a Blank Screen or a Blank Button as Shown below.

OFF0

Breaker 12

ON 1

ON 2 OFF2

ON 4

ON 6

OFF4 ON 5

Reset

Mod 12

OFF5

OFF6

Description 5 Description 6

Description 7 Description 8

“Alert are you sure you

want to change this setting

to OFF?

OK X

If a selection is made a pop-up

will appear to confirm the

selection.

Figure 4-50. TSD Blank Button

Page 117: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-59

4.16 DNP3

4.16.1 Description

DNP3 is a communications protocol to allow automatic collection of data from remote devices.

This provides communication for slower networks and Ethernet. Communications on an as-

needed basis reduces the overhead required.

The System Firmware version must be 2.2.0 or greater.

DNP (Distributed Network Protocol) is used by a “master” station (control center) to poll

multiple “slave” devices for status, usually over a wide geographic area. Since many devices

are involved and each device has many “points” or values, a class-based polling system is

applied, similar to an RBE (report-by-exception) scheme. Class 1 polls are done most

frequently, on the most important data, Class 2 less frequently, and Class 3 even less frequently.

When a Class 1, 2 or 3 poll is executed, the “slave” device only returns those values which have

changed state since the last poll. A Class 0 poll returns all values regardless of whether they

have changed state or not. For more information on Data Points see section 4.16.1.2.

4.16.1.1 Overview of HPS/RFL GARD Pro System DNP3

The HPS/RFL GARD Pro system controller board has factory installed software that allows the

user to take advantage of the robust and flexible features of the DNP communications protocol.

Once configured, the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system will communicate with up to two TCP/IP

and one RS-485 remote DNP master computers. The remote master computers poll the

HPS/RFL GARD Pro system for data.

DNP Master

Computer 1

RFL™ GARD

Pro™ System

DNP Slave Controller Board

DNP

Request

RS-485

Response

PLC Module

Counters

Analog Values Deadband

RFL™ GARD

Pro™ System

Logic

RFL™ GARD

Pro™ System

Counters

HMIDNP Master

Computer 2

Request

TCP/IP

Response

DNP Master

Computer 3

Request

Response

TCP/IP

Page 118: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-60

The HPS/RFL GARD Pro system can send the following list of data to the master computers:

Table 4-6. HPS/RFL GARD Pro system list of DNP3 data points

HPS/RFL GARD Pro system

DNP Object Notes

Normal Change event

Source Description Labels3 units Description Type Var Type Var

System Logic

HMI input HMI Input 0-63 n/a Binary output 10 2 11 1 50 ms2

HMI output HMI Output 0-63 n/a Binary input 1 1 2 1 50 ms2

SOE Counters Counters of the SOE Triggers n/a 32-bit Binary Counter 20 1 22 1

SOE triggers SOE triggers 0-191 n/a Binary input 1 1 2 21 1 ms

2

PLC FSK

Analog Values

Tx Power Rx Level Reflected Power Signal-to-Noise Ratio Trans Hybrid Loss

dBm dB % dB dB

32-bit floating point 30 1 32 1

Counters

Trip 1 Key Trip 2 Key Trip 1 Rx Trip 2 Rx Rx Alarm Reflected Power Alarm

n/a 32-bit Binary 20 1 22 1

Internally these

counters are 8-bit

and rollover at 255

PLC On/Off

Analog Values

Tx Power Rx Level Reflected Power SNR

dBm dB % dB

32-bit floating point 30 1 32 1

Counters

Start 1 Start 2 Stop 1 Stop 2 Block Rx Reserve Key Checkback Tests Run Checkback Tests Passed Checkback Tests Failed

n/a 32-bit Binary 20 1 22 1

Internally these

counters are 8-bit

and rollover at 255

Note 1: For change events, SOE Trigger points will be reported with timestamps synchronized

to the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system clock and as reported in the Sequence of Events report.

Note 2: To be recorded as a DNP change event, the duration of the event must be a minimum

of 1 millisecond for SOE Trigger points or 50 milliseconds for HMI Out and HMI In.

Note 3: Functional Module Point labels can be configured through the appropriate DNP

configuration pages. To change the default labels for Functional Module Points navigate to the

appropriate tabs on the Configuration > DNP > point type pages.

The System Logic Point labels can be changed in the appropriate Configuration > SOE and

Advanced > HMI pages.

To make use of the DNP feature the user must configure the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system

appropriately using the “DNP3 Configuration” web page; Configuration > DNP > General.

This sets up the communication parameters allowing the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system to

connect with other devices.

Page 119: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-61

Once the DNP configuration page is set other parameters such as the “Point list setting” web

pages can be configured.

Note: DNP will not be functional until at least one DNP point is enabled.

To reduce polling traffic, the GARD Pro can be set to send unsolicited messages to any of the

DNP3 masters. Unsolicited messages are sent when a binary object changes state or an analog

value changes by more than a user adjustable deadband setting. The unsolicited message

capability is disabled by default and must be enabled via an “Enable Unsolicited Messages”

command from the DNP master.

Note:

Since the unsolicited messaging setting of the GARD Pro is not stored in NVRAM, it must be

enabled by the DNP Master each time the GARD Pro is power-cycled."

4.16.1.2 DNP3 Features

The HPS/RFL GARD Pro system provides the following features to aid managing the system.

4.16.1.2.1 Data Point Refresh Time

In some cases the refresh rate of DNP points may be slower than the actual event duration.

This means it is possible that events which occur within the refresh time will be missed and not

recorded as a DNP change event.

In the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system the refresh time for SOE Trigger DNP points is 1

millisecond. For HMI In and HMI Out the refresh time is 50 milliseconds.

In order for an event to be recorded as a DNP change event, the duration of each state must be a

minimum of 1 millisecond for SOE Trigger points or 50 milliseconds for HMI Out and HMI In.

4.16.1.2.2 Data Point Index manual assignment

Manually assigned data point indexes is provided as an alternative to auto assigned. This

requires the user to manually assign each data point index. Indexes can be freely assigned

within an object type as long as there are no duplicates indexes.

Manual mode also includes a default index assignment option which applies a default index for

each point. Default indexes for points sourced from installed modules, where available, are

based on the slot number and location.

Page 120: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-62

4.16.1.2.3 Data Point Index manual default assignment rules

The DNP data point index is a sequential number assigned to a data point of a particular Object

Type. Each data point within an Object Type has a unique data point index.

Index rules apply to each object type independently.

Each physical slot has 100 points reserved in the index space.

Index ranges for each slot are as follows:

o Slot 1 = 200-299

o Slot 2 = 300-399

o Slot 3 = 400-499

o Slot 4 = 500-599

o Slot 5 = 600-699

o Slot 6 = 700-799

o Slot 7 = 800-899

o Slot 8 = 900-999

o Slot 9 = 1000-1099

o Slot 10 = 1100-1199

Default index ranges by slot are divided by front, rear top/right and rear bottom/left. The

divided ranges are as follows:

o Front: n*100 + 0…63 (64 total)

o Rear: n*100 + 64…99

Within the rear: Top/Right: 64-81 (18 total), Bottom/Left: 72-99 (18 total)

4.16.1.2.4 Data Point Index auto-assign rules

In auto implementation the data point index is assigned when the points are enabled in the point

list settings. This means that the data point indexes will change as points are enabled or

disabled.

Example of auto-index numbering: If data point 1, 3 and 5 are enabled the device will assign

these with an index of 0, 1 and 2. If data point 2 is added data point 3 and 5 will become index

2 and 3.

When using auto index assignments a priority rule is used to sequential assign index numbers

within a point type. Priority is determined by the source of the point and the slot number and

location. The priority rules are as follows:

System Logic Points (SOE triggers, HMI bits)

Lowest Slot Number

Front Slot Position

Rear top/right to Rear bottom/left

Caution:

Switching to manual retains the existing the auto-index assignments.

If you switch back to auto this will renumber all index assignments according to the auto-assign

rules.

Page 121: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-63

4.16.2 DNP Configuration

4.16.2.1 DNP - General Configuration page

Configuration > DNP > General

This screen allows the user to configure the DNP communications with the DNP master(s).

Page 122: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-64

Table 4-7. General Configuration fields

Field Name Description Allowed values Default setting

Enable DNP

Slave

DNP service is turned on globally for the HPS/RFL GARD Pro

system. DNP communications are only active if at least one

data point is turned on.

ON, OFF OFF

Point Index

Mapping

Auto sets data points sequentially without gaps and reorders the

list as new points are added or taken away. Manual mode

allows for gaps between index numbers between index numbers,

and allows for fixed index values. This is a global control for

all point list pages.

Auto, Manual Auto

Link Layer

Addressing

Determine the Source and Destination addresses for the DNP

link layer.

1-255

(increment = 1)

Source = 3,

Destination = 4

TCP/IP

Master 1

Allows the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system DNP slave to

communicate to a DNP master which is defined by the IP

address and port number.

ON, OFF OFF

Master 1 IP The IP address of TCP/IP Master 1 for which communications

will be established. This field is disabled if “TCP/IP Master 1”

is set to OFF.

n.n.n.n (valid

IP address)

0.0.0.0 (slave

responds to any

master.)

Master 1

Port #

The port number of TCP/IP Master 1 for which communications

will be established. This field is disabled if “TCP/IP Master 1”

is set to OFF

2000 – 65535

(increment 1)

20000

TCP/IP

Master 2

Allows the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system DNP slave to

communicate to a DNP master which is defined by the IP

address and port number.

ON, OFF OFF

Master 2 IP The IP address of TCP/IP Master 2 for which communications

will be established. This field is disabled if “TCP/IP Master 2”

is set to OFF.

n.n.n.n (valid

IP address)

0.0.0.0 (slave

respond to any

master.)

Master 2

Port #

The port number of TCP/IP Master 2 for which communications

will be established. This field is disabled if “TCP/IP Master 2”

is set to OFF.

2000 – 65535

(increment 1)

20001

RS-485

Master

Allows the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system DNP slave to

communicate to an RS-485 DNP master.

ON, OFF OFF

RS-485

Mode

Determines whether the RS-485 port uses 2-wire or 4-wire

mode to communicate with the RS-485 master. This field is

disabled if “RS-485 Master” is set to OFF.

2-wire, 4-wire 4-wire

Data

Format

The serial data format of the RS-485 communication. This field

is disabled if “RS-485 Master” is set to OFF.

Parity/Stop bit

Serial

Data Rate

None Even Odd

1 2 1 2 1 2

300 X X X X

2400 X X X X X X

4800 X X X X X X

9600 X X X X X X

See table 9600-None-1

Cancel Cancel any changes made in the web page, and reset them to the values when the page was first

opened. Clicking this button brings up a confirmation dialog.

This button is disabled if no changes were made.

Save Writes the changes made to the settings in the web page. Clicking this button brings up a

confirmation dialog.

This button is disabled if no changes were made.

Page 123: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-65

4.16.2.2 DNP Point Type Configuration

The following descriptions apply to all “Type” configuration pages: Type 1, Type 10, Type 20,

and Type 30.

4.16.2.3 Type 1 – Binary Input

Configuration > DNP > “Type 1 – Binary Input”

This page lists any DNP Type 1 Binary Input points available for reporting. System Logic HMI

Outputs and SOE Triggers are always available. However, only those points which are enabled

for SOE recording are available for DNP reporting. Points from different sources are organized

on separate tabs.

NOTE: Only those SOE Triggers which are enabled for recording in the Config > SOE page

are displayed in this page.

Page 124: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-66

Table 4-8. DNP Type Configuration Field Descriptions

Name Description Values

Index Indicates to the user whether or not it is set up for

Auto or Manual indexing. This is set on the Config

> DNP > General page.

Auto, Manual

“All”

control -

Class

The Class selected with the “All” button applies to

all points in the table. If “Enable” is unchecked the

Class selection tool is disabled.

Class 1, Class 2, Class 3, Class 0

“All”

control -

Enable

Selecting the Enable or Disable from the All button

applies to all points in the table.

Enable, Disable

Index This column shows the index value of the point in

the same row. For Auto, the Index field will auto-

update as points are enabled and disabled, to indicate

to the user that the point list is being dynamically

assigned on the points which are enabled/disabled .

Control disabled if: Indexing mode = Auto

Auto- the index number is assigned and cannot

be modified.

Manual- any number within the valid range

defined by manual indexing rules described

above, as long as the index value is not already

assigned to another point of the same type.

Parameter

#

This is the fixed HPS/RFL GARD Pro system

parameter #. For example, HMIOUT60, while it can

have an index value manually assigned, will always

have parameter # of 60. This field allows the user to

assign connections between DNP points and their

index numbers, back to the HPS/RFL GARD Pro

system and logic.

System/functional module parameter number.

Label For functional module points this field is a user

entered label. For system logic points this field is

read only. SOE Trigger labels can be changed in the

Configuration > SOE page, and HMI labels can be

changed in the "Advanced > HMI Bits page

System logic points: HMI labels and SOE labels

Functional module points: Default, User edit

Class This determines the class of the associated DNP

point in the same row. Default class:

Type 1 - Class 1

Type 10 - Class 1

Type 20 - Class 3

Type 30 - Class 2

The default is Class 1 and control is disabled if:

DNP Point enable = “OFF”

Class 1, Class 2, Class 3, Class 0.

Enable This control determines whether or not the associated

point will be included in the DNP engine for

reporting.

The default is “Off”.

On, Off (check box control, as shown in

screenshot)

Default

Index

Assigns point index values according to GARD Pro

defaults.

Available only with Point Index Mapping set to

Manual (Configuration > DNP > General)

GARD Pro assigns HMIOUT bits from 0 to 63

according to the HMIOUT bit number.

Cancel Resets any changes to the values when the page was first opened. Clicking this button will bring up a

confirmation dialog.

This button is disabled if no changes were made.

Save This control will write the changes made to the settings in the web page. Clicking this button will bring

up a confirmation dialog.

This button is disabled if no changes were made.

Page 125: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-67

4.16.2.4 Type 10 – Binary Output

Configuration > DNP > Type 10 – Binary Output

This page lists any DNP Type 10 Binary Outputs points available for reporting. System Logic

HMI Inputs are always available. Points from different sources are organized on separate tabs.

4.16.2.5 Type 20 – Counter

Configuration > DNP > Type 20 – Counter

NOTE: Only those SOE Triggers which are enabled for recording in the Config > SOE page

are displayed in this page.

This page lists any DNP Type 20 Counter points available for reporting. System Logic SOE

Trigger Counters are always available. Additional points may be available when DNP-enabled

modules are installed. Points from different sources are organized on separate tabs.

If the SOE triggers are configured for DNP in this page, and the user enables more SOE triggers

in the Config > SOE page at a later time, those newly enabled SOE triggers will be disabled by

default. Therefore index numbers won’t change if using Auto-index mode.

Page 126: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-68

If an SOE trigger is enabled for DNP recording/reporting, the control to enable/disable the SOE

trigger in the Config > SOE page will be disabled. Any SOE trigger which is enabled for DNP

cannot be disabled for SOE recording until it has been disabled for DNP. This is to ensure the

integrity of the DNP point list indexes.

The first tab configures the SOE counters

Page 127: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-69

The remaining tabs configure any points available as supported by DNP-capable modules such

as the PLC modules.

Page 128: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-70

4.16.2.6 Type 30 – Analog

Configuration > DNP > Type 30 – Analog

This page lists any DNP Type 30 Analog points available for reporting. This option is only

available when supporting modules are installed. Points from different sources are organized on

separate tabs.

4.16.2.6.1 Deadband:

Specifies the integer value, in the units of the particular point, by which an analog value must

change before it will be reported at the next poll or generating an unsolicited message, if

configured.

The units used for the deadband setting depend on the measurement type. For example,

Reflected Power is measured in percent. So a deadband setting of 20 requires the Reflected

Power to change by +/- 20% before the GARD Pro will report a change in value to the DNP

master.

Page 129: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-71

The “deadband” value operates per-point. Each point in the DNP analog settings has its own

deadband value which the user sets on this page.

4.16.3 DNP Status Webpages

4.16.3.1 “General” tab

Status > DNP > General

This page shows general status of the DNP masters. There is also an option to download a

“DNP Profile” which is a report of the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system DNP capabilities, and also

the current configuration.

Page 130: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-72

Table 4-9. DNP Status fields

Name Description Values

DNP Status: Displays the status of the HPS/RFL GARD Pro

system DNP engine. Based on the setting in the

Config > DNP > General page.

Disabled (gray outline), Enabled

(green outline)

GARD Pro

(Source)

The Link Layer source address. The address of the

GARD Pro DNP slave.

This displays the value set for

Configuration > DNP > General

GARD Pro (Source)

DNP Master

(Destination)

The Link Layer destination address. The address of

the DNP Master to which the GARD Pro will

report.

This displays the value set for

Configuration > DNP > General

DNP Master (Destination)

TCP/IP Master

1:

Displays the status of the HPS/RFL GARD Pro

system DNP reporting to TCP/IP Master 1. Based

on the setting in the Config > DNP > General page.

Disabled (gray outline), Enabled

(green outline)

Master 1 IP: Displays the programmed IP address for the TCP/IP

Master 1. Based on the setting in the Config > DNP

> General page.

n/a (gray outline – if TCP/IP

Master 1 disabled),

IP address for TCP/IP Master 1

Master 1 Port

#:

Displays the programmed port number for the

TCP/IP Master 1. Based on the setting in the

Config > DNP > General page.

n/a (gray outline – if TCP/IP

Master 1 disabled),

Port # for TCP/IP Master 1

TCP/IP Master

2:

Displays the status of the HPS/RFL GARD Pro

system DNP reporting to TCP/IP Master 2. Based

on the setting in the Config > DNP > General page.

Disabled (gray outline), Enabled

(green outline)

Master 2 IP: Displays the programmed IP address for the TCP/IP

Master 2. Based on the setting in the Config > DNP

> General page.

n/a (gray outline – if TCP/IP

Master 2 disabled),

IP address for TCP/IP Master 2

Master 2 Port

#:

Displays the programmed port number for the

TCP/IP Master 2. Based on the setting in the

Config > DNP > General page.

n/a (gray outline – if TCP/IP

Master 2 disabled), Port # for

TCP/IP Master 2

RS-485

Master:

Displays the status of the HPS/RFL GARD Pro

system DNP reporting to the RS-485 Master. Based

on the setting in the Config > DNP > General page.

Disabled (gray outline), Enabled

(green outline)

RS-485 Mode: Displays the programmed communication mode for

GARD Pro RS-485 master. Based on the setting in

the Config > DNP > General page.

n/a (gray 2-wire/4-wire outline –

RS-485 disabled),

communication mode for RS-485

master

Data format: Displays the programmed data format for the RS-

485 Master. Based on the setting in the Config >

DNP > General page.

n/a (gray outline – if RS-485

Master disabled),

data format for RS-485 master

Download DNP

Profile:

Clicking this button opens the browser download dialog HPS/RFL GARD Pro system

“Save” dialog and prompt the user to save a .csv file which contains the DNP Profile

document of the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system. This report contains enabled points and

their classes and index numbers, as well as global parameters.

Page 131: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-73

4.16.3.2 “Point List” tab

Status > DNP > General

The Point List displays all DNP points which are currently enabled for DNP reporting. Only

the Index numbers, Labels, data Source and Class settings are displayed here.

All object types are displayed together in one continuous list.

If a particular DNP point group has no DNP points enabled, then that group will not be

displayed on this page.

4.16.3.3 Field descriptions for DNP status

Points from different sources are organized on separate tabs.

The “Value” field is updated dynamically.

If a particular object type has no points enabled, the user will still be brought to this page, but

instead of seeing this table the user will see a message, “No points enabled for Type (n)”

The following descriptions apply to the DNP type-specific status pages.

Table 4-10. Field descriptions for DNP status

Name Description

Index The index number assigned to the parameter.

Parameter # Internal system parameter number.

Label The label assigned to the parameter.

Value The current value in that register.

Class The reporting class of that parameter – 1, 2, 3 or 0

Page 132: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-74

4.16.3.4 Type 1 Binary Input

Status > DNP > “Type 1 – Binary Input”

4.16.3.5 Type 10 – Binary Output

Status > DNP > Binary Output

Page 133: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-75

4.16.3.6 Type 20 Counter

Status > DNP > “Type 20 – Counter”

Page 134: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-76

4.16.3.7 Type 30 Analog Input

Status -> DNP > “Type 30 – Analog Input”

4.16.4 DNP TSD Status pages

4.16.4.1 TSD Menu Page: Home > Status

Page 135: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-77

4.16.4.2 TSD Menu Page: Home > Status > DNP

The touch-screen display will have status-only display of DNP points. The Point List is static –

it is assumed that no changes will be made to the DNP point list when viewing the list on the

TSD. If point-list changes are made, the User can press “Refresh” on the TSD to update, if

desired.

The DNP Values will update dynamically as the DNP points are refreshed.

Page 136: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-78

4.17 SNMP

4.17.1 Description

SNMP is supported on GARD Pro system firmware versions 2.2.0 or greater. The version can be

read on the System Management > Inventory & Version Info page. This provides an SNMP Agent

which allows RTC (Real Time Clock) time stamped v2c SNMP Trap Messages to be sent via

the rear Ethernet port. These messages are triggered by changes in the HMI output bits as

defined by the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system logic. In addition SNMP v3 GET functionality is

supported, allowing read access to the GARD Pro system parameters.

The SNMP Agent does the following:

Provides SNMP Traps and Transmits RTC based time stamped alarms and other

events to the customer’s software management equipment based on custom

HPS/RFL GARD Pro system logic HMI output bit changes.

Supports up to five management IP addresses.

Supports the GET operation to view the values in the MIB.

Page 137: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-79

4.17.1.1 Traps

When the Trap Agent receives an HMI output change notification, it produces one SNMP Trap

Message for each HMI output bit change, and sends that message to all enabled SNMP

management IP addresses. One bit change mask can have from one to 64 bits set, with all

monitoring computers enabled the Trap Agent generates up to 320 Trap Messages.

Each Trap Message contains the following data:

• The HMI-OUT bit number

• The HMI-OUT bit value (after the change)

• The HMI-OUT bit label

• The RTC based time -stamp

• The User System Labels as set in the System Configuration page. They are default

under the names shown but can be labeled at the user’s discretion. "Chassis

Identification" through "Appropriate Use Warning" are user-entered labels.

HMI output bits are completely defined by the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system logic. Custom

logic to generate HMI output bit changes facilitates reporting of events important at the

monitoring stations.

Note: Contact RFL for custom logic applications.

4.17.1.2 Get

SNMP “Get” Functionality

SNMP Get uses SNMP v3 authenticated access to view GARD Pro system parameters. No

parameter changes are permitted. The parameters available for viewing are defined in the

SNMP MIB file. See SNMP MIB in 4.17.3 for a list of the MIBs scalar and table structure.

Note: This software supports “get” functionality only.

Page 138: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-80

4.17.1.2.1 Changing the password

The default SNMP v3 username and password is set in the factory to the following:

Login: Admin

Password: Admin

RFL advises you to change the default password to a unique value. Change the password using

the following steps:

1. Navigate to the password change screen.

System Management > Users > Change Password

2. Enter the current password in the “Current Password:” field.

3. Enter the new password in the “New Password” field. The password must follow these

requirements:

Password must be between 8 and 14 characters long, and must contain at least three of

the following character types: uppercase letters, lowercase letters, numbers, and special

characters. Allowed special characters are ~!@#$%^_-+=[].?

4. Reenter the new password in the “Confirm New Password” field.

Page 139: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-81

4.17.2 SNMP Configuration Webpages

Configuration > SNMP

4.17.2.1 Page Details

The Configure SNMP page allows the user to enable/disable and configure the GARD’s

reporting for up to 5 SNMP trap receivers.

The configuration section configures the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system to report SNMP traps to

up to 5 receivers. Both “community” and “IP address” are always active for editing, whether

the particular receiver is enabled or not.

Table 4-11. SNMP Configuration webpage fields

Name Description Value

# The number of the trap receiver Read only value

Community Provides a means of grouping related devices for

simplified security.

Text string

IP Address The IP address of the trap receiver. Valid IP address

Enable Enable the trap. Checked or unchecked

4.17.2.1.1 Download SNMP Trap Receiver MIB

The configuration section also presents a button called “Download SNMP Trap Receiver MIB”.

This opens the browser’s download dialog where the user can download a file to the user’s PC.

The file is the “SNMP Trap Receiver MIB”, the same file which is available on the System

Management > File Operations (Save) page.

Page 140: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

System Configuration

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

4-82

4.17.3 SNMP MIB Pages

4.17.3.1 SNMP trap MIB contents

The SNMP Trap MIB file can be downloaded from the GARD Pro system through the

Management > File Operations (Save) page, or on the Configuration > SNMP page.

The following table provides the SNMP Trap MIB contents provided with each generated trap

message.

Table 4-12. SNMP trap MIB contents

MIB Field Description

Object Identifier

IMPORTS OBJECT-TYPE, MODULE-IDENTITY, …

gardPro MODULE-IDENTITY A mib for HPS/RFL GARD Pro system.

eventNotifications and the eventNotificationObjects

hmiOutBitNumber HMI Output Logic Bit Number.

hmiOutBitState HMI Output Logic Bit Value.

hmiOutLabel HMI Output Logic Bit Label.

userSystemLabel1 User System Label 1.

userSystemLabel2 User System Label 2.

userSystemLabel3 User System Label 3.

realTimeClockTimeStamp Real time clock time stamp taken at the time of the event.

hmiOutStateChange

State change for: hmiOutBitNumber, hmiOutBitState, hmiOutLabel, realTimeClockTimeStamp

4.17.3.2 SNMP Get MIB

The "SNMP Agent MIB" provides the definitions for the parameters available from the GARD

Pro using the SNMP Get functionality. A standard MIB browser allows the user to request

values and view them.

Page 141: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-1

Power Line Carrier Section 5.

5.1 Power Line Carrier Function

The HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ system with Power Line Carrier (PLC) is a Single Function

PLC protection unit. The PLC function consists of two plug-in modules: A digital module

which plugs into the front of the chassis, and an Analog module which plugs into the rear of the

chassis. Both modules can be installed in a 3U or 6U the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system chassis.

The single function channel can be configured for two modes of operation: FSK (Frequency

Shift Key), or On/Off. In FSK mode, it can be configured to support either 2F or 3F operation.

In On/Off mode, it can be configured to support both Normal Checkback and Hard Carrier

Checkback.

In addition to performing the normal PLC functions, the unit will monitor the transmit interface

to measure transmit power, reflected power, trans-hybrid loss, and receive signal strength.

5.1.1 FSK Operation

As stated above the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system with PLC supports two FSK operational

modes: 2F and 3F.

In 2F operation a guard tone is located at a fixed deviation below or above the channel center

frequency. At the occurrence of a trip, the tone shifts to the opposite side of the channel center

frequency.

In 3F operation a guard tone is located at the channel center frequency. One of two following

trips can occur causing the tone shift a fixed deviation:

1. below the channel center frequency

2. above the channel center frequency

The performance of 2F and 3F operation is defined by the Maximum Trip Transport Delay,

Dependability and Security.

- Maximum Trip Transport Delay: The time between the following two events:

1) When the unit transmitter is notified of a trip event through the Logic Bus, until

2) The unit receiver on the other side of the link writes the trip event into the Logic Bus

status registers.

More specifically, it is defined as the delay between the Logic Bus frame reception

interrupt which contains the trip event information until the status register is written in

the receiver. The Maximum Trip Transport Delay is defined by the three operational

configurations for the following:

o 2F operation in TABLE 5-1.

o 3F operation in TABLE 5-2.

See FIGURE 5-1 Minimum Channel Spacing (FSK).

- Dependability: The probability that a trip event will be successfully communicated to

the other end of the link within the Maximum Trip Transport Delay as a function of the

signal to noise ratio of the link.

Page 142: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-2

- Security: The probability that a false trip event will be declared at the receive end of

the link as a function of the signal to noise ratio of the link.

5.1.1.1 Trip Transport Delay and Channel Spacing

Table 5-1 2F Trip Transport Delay and Channel Spacing

Configuration Settings

Nominal Trip Transport Delay (With recommended Settings)

Minimum Permissible Unidirectional Channel Spacing

Minimum Permissible Bidirectional Channel Spacing

Nominal Receive Bandwidth: 200 Hz

TX Frequency Shift: +/- 100 Hz

12.0 – 13.0 ms 500 Hz 1000 Hz

Nominal Receive Bandwidth: 500 Hz

TX Frequency Shift: +/- 250 Hz

8.0 ms 1250 Hz 2500 Hz

Nominal Receive Bandwidth: 1000 Hz

TX Frequency Shift: +/- 500 Hz

6.0 ms 2500 Hz 5000 Hz

Table 5-2 3F Trip Transport Delay and Channel Spacing

Configuration Settings

Nominal Trip Transport Delay (With recommended Settings)

Minimum Permissible Unidirectional Channel Spacing

Minimum Permissible Bidirectional Channel Spacing

Nominal Receive Bandwidth: 200 Hz

TX Frequency Shift: +/- 200 Hz

12.0 – 13.0 ms 700 Hz 1200 Hz

Nominal Receive Bandwidth: 500 Hz

TX Frequency Shift: +/- 500 Hz

8.0 ms 1750 Hz 3000 Hz

Nominal Receive Bandwidth: 1000 Hz

TX Frequency Shift: +/- 1000 Hz

6.0 ms 3500 Hz 6000 Hz

Page 143: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-3

The example illustration on the following page shows the channel spacing in FSK mode for a

200 Hz receive band width in unidirectional and bidirectional operation.

Unidirectional

200 Hz

TX Center BW TX Center BW

TX Center BW

200 Hz

TX Center BWUnidirectional

700 Hz Minimum Channel

Spacing

Shift Up Shift Down

Bidirectional

1000 Hz Minimum Channel

Spacing

TX Center BW RX Center BW

TX Center BW

RX Center BW

Bidirectional

Shift Up Shift Down

500 Hz Minimum Channel

Spacing

1200 Hz Minimum Channel

Spacing

Min. Spacing for 2F – 200Hz Bandwidth

Min. Spacing for 3F – 200Hz Bandwidth

200 Hz

200 Hz200 Hz

200 Hz200 Hz 200 Hz

200 Hz 200 Hz 200 Hz 200 Hz

Figure 5-1. Minimum Channel Spacing (FSK)

Page 144: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-4

5.1.2 On/Off Operation

On/Off operation defines the absence of a tone (Off) to be the guard condition. The presence of

a tone (On) is the block condition. Since there is no tone present under normal non-block

operating conditions, no receive AGC functions may be performed. Therefore, the nominal

receive signal level is determined during deployment, and the operating parameters of the

system are set accordingly and maintained in non-volatile memory of the Module.

In order to determine that the link is operating normally, a checkback process is used to test the

link. For the purposes of checkback, the Module at the near end of the link is defined as the

Master and the Module at the far end of the link is defined as the Remote. During checkback, a

pre-defined sequence of On/Off states (checkback codes) is transmitted by the Master to the

Remote which responds with an acknowledgement on a successful reception.

The Remote responds in one of two ways depending on how the Master terminates its

transmission of the Checkback Code. One of two responses will occur:

1) Hard Carrier Mode: If the Master leaves the tone on for 5 or more seconds after the

last bit of the Checkback Code, the Remote responds in Hard Carrier Mode. In Hard

Carrier Mode, the Remote responds by transmitting a tone to the Master for a pre-

defined length of time.

2) Normal Mode: Otherwise, the Remote responds in Normal Mode. In Normal Mode,

the Remote responds by transmitting a pre-defined sequence of On/Off states (called the

Acknowledgement Code) to the Master.

Four Hard Carrier transmitted codes and two received codes can be programmed into either the

master or remote units. Operation from either end is possible.

Checkback may be initiated automatically by either the Master or the Remote. It may also be

initiated manually by the user. Remote initiation is accomplished by sending a specific code to

the master. This code tells the master to initiate a test sequence. This code is not available as a

response code from remotes for normal tests.

On/Off Systems transmit and receive on the same frequency. Therefore, the local receiver

cannot differentiate between remote transmissions and local transmissions. In addition,

checkback sequences are detected as a sequence of block events. The local receiver will report

all block events through the Logic Bus interface whether the source is from local transmissions,

checkback sequences, or real block events. It is up to the logging mechanism in the Logic

Controller to filter out unwanted SOE reports. To aid in this filtering the module will indicate

that a test is in process through a bit on the logic bus that is active while a test is ongoing in a

master or while an incoming code is detected in a remote.

The performance of On/Off operation is defined by the Maximum Block Transport Delay,

Dependability and Security. These are the same definitions for FSK in 5.1.1 with the exception

the Maximum Block Transport Delay for On/Off operation is defined by the three operational

configurations given in the table below, TABLE 5-3.

Page 145: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-5

Table 5-3 On/Off Block Transport Delay and Channel Spacing

Configuration Settings Nominal Block Transport Delay

Minimum Permissible Channel Spacing

Nominal Receive Bandwidth: 500 Hz 5 ms 1 kHz

Nominal Receive Bandwidth: 1000 Hz 3 ms 2 kHz

Nominal Receive Bandwidth: 1500 Hz 1.5 ms 3 kHz

Security & Dependability do not really apply to an On/Off unit. The unit should issue a block

received output any time there is sufficient energy in the receive band regardless of total SNR.

Instead of security, adjacent channel rejection is probably more relevant. Dependability of an

On/Off unit should remain constant as noise increases until the input circuits (or DSP numbers)

saturate.

5.1.3 Compatibility Issues for PLC Module Software

For users of older GARD Systems:

The PLC Module Software is used with the GARD Custom System Logic to meet each user’s

specific application needs. The PLC Module Logic and HPS/RFL GARD Pro system PLC

System Logic were updated and both logic versions need to agree.

Beginning in October 2011, new PLC software (indicated as V17) was released to improve the

functionality of the unit. Although these changes are transparent to the end user, certain

compatibility issues with the new PLC software and older System Logic should be noted.

Units shipped after October 2011 have updated default PLC System Logic, however if GARD

units are modified in the field and have either new PLC software with old PLC System Logic or

the reverse, the units may not perform as expected. The two scenarios are described below:

Table 5-4. Compatibility Issues for PLC Module Software

New PLC software/Old system logic New System Logic/Old PLC software

The function to disable the Transmitter from an external input will not function.

The security against unwanted operations

in FSK mode will be slightly reduced.

The unblocking feature in FSK will not work.

The RX SNR alarm will not work.

Because of these differences, care must be taken when swapping modules or reusing the

“Whole Chassis Configuration” files from different versions.

The following is invalid:

Transferring existing PLC Digital Modules with V13 software (or earlier) into

units with updated System PLC Logic (V17 software).

Transferring new PLC Digital Modules (V17 software) into existing units with

previous System PLC Logic revision, other than V17.

Page 146: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-6

Loading any whole chassis configuration files not identified as V17 (-A17-) into

units with new V17 PLC Digital Modules.

Loading whole chassis configuration files with the new revision into units with

existing PLC Digital Modules (version V13 or earlier).

Identifying revision levels:

PLC Module software and System Logic:

Through the web interface, System Management > Inventory and Version Info

The revision of a System Logic or Whole Chassis Configuration file can be determined by its

file name. See the example below, taking note of the “17” identification after the revision

letter.

Logic Filename: GARD3U175_00146_001_A17.EDN,.TXT,.DSN.PDF

Whole Chassis Configuration Filename:

GARD3U175_00146_001_A17_C01.ZIP

When creating new Whole Chassis Configuration Files verify the version of the logic loaded

into the unit. If the unit has V17 System Logic installed then mark the filename with a V17

indication. This file should only be loaded into units with V17 PLC Module software.

RFL will modify any logic designed for the previous PLC software version (V13) and earlier

PLC software to work with version 17. Please do not hesitate to contact HPS/RFL for technical

support at 973-334-3100 ext 226 or via e-mail at [email protected]

Page 147: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-7

5.2 Making Connections to the Rear Analog PLC Module

Please refer to the “as supplied drawing” provided with your the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system

for customer specific wiring details, an example is shown below.

Note:

Any field modifications should only be performed by qualified personnel.

Front view of RFL™ GARD

Pro™ System chassis

Front view of RFL™ GARD

Pro™ System chassis with

front panel removed

Rear view of RFL™ GARD

Pro™ System chassis

Jumper Settings

(PLC option)Input/Output

mapping

System Jumper

Settings

Figure 5-2. As Supplied Drawing

CAUTION

Electro Static Discharge damage

The HPS/RFL GARD Pro system PLC Module set is a Static Sensitive Device. Persons

working on this equipment must observe Electro Static Discharge (ESD) precautions. As a

minimum you must use anti-static devices such as wrist straps and floor mats and leave

modules in their anti-static bags until they are ready to be installed.

Before proceeding to make connections to the Analog PLC Module, ensure that all the modules

in the chassis are correctly seated:

1) Remove the front panel to the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system chassis

2) Using minimal force, remove and re-seat all front panel modules.

Typically when a single PLC module set is used they are installed in a 3U chassis, however if

more than one PLC is required a 6U chassis is needed. Depending on the configuration and

power consumption limits a second power supply may be required. Details on external

connections to a second power supply are shown in Section 5.8. Following is the PLC Analog

Module as it would appear in the rear of a 3U chassis.

Page 148: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-8

CA

UT

ION

ST

AT

ICS

EN

SIT

IVER

13

AM

PIM

PE

DA

DJ

R8

AM

P G

AIN

AD

J

R1

9T

X F

AIL

AD

J

PA

OU

T

RX

IN

FIN

E

CO

AR

SE

TX

/RX

2W

TX

4

WR

X

GN

D

+1

5V

-15

V

GN

DC

LI

Type BNC connectors to

the power line interface

Terminal block for connecting external

CLI meter or second power supply

Pin 1

Figure 5-3. HPS/RFL GARD Pro system PLC Analog Module

Table 5-5 TB1 Terminal Assignments

Reference Designation Function

TB1-1 +15Vdc from external supply when required

TB1-2 -15Vdc from external supply when required

TB1-3 Ground

TB1-4 Carrier Level Indicator*

TB1-5 Not Used

TB1-6 Ground

* To observe the Carrier Level, connect an external meter to TB1 pins 4 and 6

Page 149: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-9

5.3 Carrier Level Indicator (CLI) Front Panel Meter

All the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system units with PLC include a Front Panel CLI Meter. The

meter is factory installed on the Front Panel as shown below.

RECEIVE LEVEL

dB

CLI Meter

PWRNET RESET

Figure 5-4. CLI Meter, Front Panel Mounting on a 3U Chassis

The PLC carrier level indicator RX value is displayed on the meter. The value displayed

represents a variance in received signal level from the initial signal level when the unit was

commissioned. The meter is normally factory installed and MUST be used in conjunction with

the Digital PLC Module (500455-1). The meter is connected to J6 on the Digital PLC Board.

There are two potentiometers for Offset and Scale. Normally no adjustments are necessary as

the CLI Meter is calibrated before leaving the factory, but if tuning is required instructions are

given in Section 5.5.5.1.

5.4 PLC Module User Interface

The web pages required for status display, configuration, calibration, and test of the PLC

module have been divided between FSK and On/Off mode. The following pages describe the

settings for FSK mode. Sliding the mouse over the question mark symbol will expose a brief

description of the settings function.

5.4.1 FSK Mode - Status, Configuration and Test

Clicking on the PLC FSK module in the dashboard will display its status as shown below. You

can also navigate to the status page from the main navigation menu at the left of the web page.

Menu location: Status > PLC > Slot 8-2F is selected.

5.4.1.1 FSK Status:

While in FSK mode, the software will sense whether a 2F or 3F function is being used and

display the settings accordingly.

Page 150: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

141516171819TX Frequency

TableRX Frequency

Table

Figure 5-5. FSK Status

1. Indicates slot number and system mode (2F or 3F), the other occupied slot may be

selected from the drop-down

Transmitter:

2. Transmitter State: Indicates the transmitter state as follows:

Table 5-6 Transmitter State

Mode Transmitter States

2F mode Guard TX Trip TX -

3F mode Guard TX Trip1 TX Trip2 TX

Note

The frequency settings as set on the FSK Configuration General web page are shown

below in the TX Frequency Table.

3. TX Power Level: Indicates the TX power output level of the PLC system in dBm

referenced to 50 Ωs.

4. TX Level Alarm: Indicates whether the transmitter is in alarm state as follows:

“TX Fail” or “No Alarm.” TX Fail alarm is factory-set to be active if the transmit level

falls below 28.5dBm

5. Reflected Power: Records the reflected power as a percent.

6. Reflected Power Level: Reports the reflected power level as follows:

“Excess Reflected Power” or “No Alarm.”

7. Current Force Carrier State: Indicates the force carrier state as follows:

Page 151: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-11

“Normal Operation,” “Forced Off,” “Forced On Low Freq,” “Forced On Center Freq,”

“Forced On High Freq.”

8. Trans Hybrid Loss: Reports the trans hybrid loss in dB.

Receiver:

9. Receiver State: Indicates the receive state as follows:

Table 5-7 Reciever State

Mode Transmitter States

2F mode Guard RX Trip RX -

3F mode Guard RX Trip1 RX Trip2 RX

Note

The frequency settings as set on the FSK Configuration General web page are shown

below in the RX Frequency Table.

10. RX Power Level: Reports the RX level in dB relative to the normal RX level set

during commissioning.

11. RX Level Alarm: Indicates whether the RX carrier is in alarm as follows:

“Low Level” or “No Alarm.”

12. SNR: Reports the SNR (Signal-to-Noise Ratio) of the receive signal in dB.

13. SNR Alarm: Reports an SNR alarm as follows:

“Channel Fail” or “No Alarm.”

The following counters increment on the rising edge of the particular function. For example

if “Trip Key 1” goes Low to High the counter will increment. It will not increment when

“Trip Key 1” goes High to Low.

Counters Receiver:

14. Trip 1 RX Count: Indicates the RX Key1 count.

15. Trip 2 RX Count: Indicates the RX Key2 count.

16. RX Alarm Count: Indicates the RX alarm count.

Counters Transmitter:

17. Trip 1 Key Count: Indicates the TX Key1 count.

18. Trip 2 Key Count: Indicates the TX Key2 count.

19. Reflected Power Alarm: Indicates the RPM fail/alarm count.

5.4.1.2 FSK Configuration – General

Menu location: Configuration > PLC > (General).

Ensure that the “General” tab is clicked. If not already enabled, the module, receiver and the

transmitter should be enabled by clicking the ON/OFF button in the appropriate region of the

web page. Once all the settings are complete click the “Save” button at the bottom right of

the web page to make the settings permanent. The TX/RX frequency mode tables will be

automatically populated with the actual frequency based on your current settings.

Page 152: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-12

1 2 3 4 5

10

6 7 8

Save buttonRX Frequency TableTX Frequency Table

General tab

9

11

12

Figure 5-6. FSK Configuration

Transmitter Enable:

1. Transmit Center Frequency: Sets the TX center frequency from 30kHz to 500kHz in

0.125kHz increments. Refer to 6.3.3 for instructions on setting the RF Power Output

Filter (TX Filter) jumpers.

2. TX Shift: Sets the TX shift from the center frequency in increments of 2.

3. TX Guard Level: Sets the transmit guard level. The selections are 1W, 3W or 10W.

4. TX Trip Level: Sets the transmit trip level. The selections are 1W, 3W or 10W.

5. TX Trip 1 Shift Direction: In 2F mode selects the trip direction. The options are

“Shift Up” or “Shift Down.” In 3F mode selects the “Trip1” direction, the “Trip2”

direction is automatically set to the opposite direction. The options are “Shift Up” or

“Shift Down.”

Receiver Enable:

6. RX Center Frequency: Sets the RX center frequency from 30kHz to 500kHz in

0.125kHz increments.

7. RX Bandwidth: Set to 200Hz, 500Hz or 1000Hz.

Note: For 3F systems you must select the bandwidth between the center frequency and

either the “Shift Up” or “Shift Down” frequency. Not the total bandwidth from shift

up to shift down frequencies.

8. RX Trip 1 Shift Direction: In 2F mode selects the trip direction. The options are

“Shift Up” or “Shift Down.” In 3F mode selects the “Trip1” direction, the “Trip2”

Page 153: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-13

direction is automatically set to the opposite direction. The options are “Shift Up” or

“Shift Down.”

9. Pretrip Timer: Determines how long a FSK trip must be present before it is declared

valid. For 200Hz, this should be set to 3.125ms. For 500Hz and 1000Hz it should be

set to 0.5ms. The time can be reduced for faster trips or lengthened for more security.

Can be set from 0-10ms in increments of 0.125ms.

RX Alarm Settings:

10. Low Signal Level Alarm: Sets the RX signal dropout threshold. If the RX level

drops more than the selected amount below nominal, an alarm is generated. The range

is from 0dB to 100dB in 1dB increments. Normally set to 10dB. Note: Disable the

corresponding alarm in the RX logic to prevent it from blocking tripping.

11. SNR Alarm Threshold: Sets the threshold below which an SNR (Signal-to-Noise

Ratio) alarm is generated. The range is from 0dB to 30dB in 1dB increments.

TX Alarm Settings:

12. Reflected Power alarm Threshold: Sets the threshold above which an RPM

(Reflected Power Meter) alarm is generated. The range is from 0% to 100% in 1%

increments.

Page 154: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-14

5.4.1.3 FSK Configuration – Advanced

Menu location: Configuration > PLC > (Advanced).

The following settings are for advanced users only. HPS/RFL recommends that the factory be

contacted before any changes are made to this web page.

1 3 4 5Advanced tab2 6 7 8Function buttons

See 5.4.1.4 9

Figure 5-7. FSK Configuration, Advanced

1. Discriminator Energy Threshold: This setting indicates the differential in signal level

between guard and trip frequencies required to declare a change of state. Should be set

to 15dB for proper operation. The range is from 0dB to 100dB in 1dB increments.

2. RX AGC Setpoint: Determines the headroom allowed in the analog section of the

receiver when commissioned. Should be set to 30.

3. Minimum Rx Level: Determines the minimum point at which a trip can be

instantaneously received. The FSK RX threshold sets the absolute level, this sets the

instantaneous level. The range is 6 to 100 in increments of 1. Must be set to 11.

4. Trip Rx Threshold: This setting determines the minimum amount of energy (below

the commission point) at which tripping is allowed. It should be set to 25 for most

applications. The range is 0 to 100 in increments of 1.

Page 155: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-15

Continued……

5. Guard Rx Threshold: This setting determines the minimum amount of energy (below

the commission point) at which the guard signal is allowed. It should be set to 35 for

most applications. The range is 0 to 100 in increments of 1.

Note: When 1 watt Guard and 10 watt Trip transmit levels are NOT used (not

common) it may be desirable to change these settings. Ideally the difference between

the Trip and Guard threshold settings should be equivalent to the difference between

the Trip and Guard transmit power levels in dB. For example with a 10W/10W system

a “Guard RX Threshold” setting of 25dB, the same as the “Trip RX Threshold”, is

appropriate as there is no difference between the Trip and Guard transmit levels.

Note: The Trip Threshold setting in versions earlier than PLC firmware v24 is called

the "RX Threshold" but works the same.

Note: The Guard RX Threshold setting became available with PLC firmware v24.

Previous versions of firmware do not have this setting available.

CAUTION Changing the following bit range settings will affect system logic.

These settings should not be changed unless directed by RFL.

Refer to the System Logic PDF for help with the following settings.

6. TX Logic Bus Start Bit: The range of TX logic bus start bits can be set from 3 to 511

in increments of 1.

7. TX Logic Bus Length: The TX logic bus length can be set from 0 to 24 in increments

of 1.

8. RX Logic Bus Start Bit: The range of RX logic bus start bits can be set from 3 to 511

in increments of 1.

9. RX Logic Bus Length: The RX logic bus length can be set from 0 to 24 in increments

of 1.

5.4.1.4 Function Buttons

When on the PLC web pages and the “Advanced” tab is selected it is possible to change the

configuration of the module from FSK to On/Off or visa-versa. When another function is

selected the user will be returned to the “Home Page” where the new function will display in

the graphical representation of the PLC Module.

Selecting another function will return the

user to the “Home Page.”

Figure 5-8. Function Buttons

Page 156: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-16

5.4.1.5 Recommended FSK Settings

RFL recommends the following settings for most standard PLC FSK applications. Be aware

that the “Logic Options” and “Logic Timer” settings may vary by logic.

Table 5-8 Recommended FSK Settings

User Interface Web Page (Path) Setting Name

Direct Transfer Trip (DTT)

Permissive Transfer Trip (PTT)

Direct Comparison Unblocking (DCUB)

DCUB with DTT (3F FSK)

Configuration > PLC (General) Module Enable ON ON ON ON

Transmitter

Configuration > PLC (General) Transmitter Enable ON ON ON ON

Configuration > PLC (General) TX Center Frequency - - - -

Configuration > PLC (General) TX Shift (+/-) 100 Hz 250 Hz 250 Hz 500 Hz

Configuration > PLC (General) TX Guard Level 1 W 1 W 1 W 1 W

Configuration > PLC (General) TX Trip Level 10 W 10 W 10 W 10 W

Configuration > PLC (General) TX Trip 1 Shift Direction

Down Down Down Down

Configuration > PLC (General) Reflected Power Alarm Threshold

20% 20% 20% 20%

Receiver

Configuration > PLC (General) Receiver Enable ON ON ON ON

Configuration > PLC (General) RX Center Frequency - - - -

Configuration > PLC (General) RX Bandwidth 200 Hz 500 Hz 500 Hz 500 Hz

Configuration > PLC (General) RX Trip 1 Shift Direction

Down Down Down Down

Configuration > PLC (General) Pretrip Timer 3.125 ms

0.5 ms 0.5 ms 0.5 ms

Configuration > PLC (General) Low Signal Level Alarm

10 dB 10 dB 10 dB 10 dB

Configuration > PLC (General) SNR Alarm Threshold 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB

Advanced

Configuration > PLC (Advanced) Function 2F 2F 2F 3F

Configuration > PLC (Advanced) Discriminator Energy Threshold

15 dB 15 dB 15 dB 15 dB

Configuration > PLC (Advanced) RX AGC Setpoint 30 dB 30 dB 30 dB 30 dB

Configuration > PLC (Advanced) Min RX Level 11 dB 11 dB 11 dB 11 dB

Configuration > PLC (Advanced) Trip RX Threshold 25 dB 25 dB 25 dB 25 dB

Configuration > PLC (Advanced) Guard RX Threshold 35 dB 35 dB 35 dB 35 dB

Configuration > PLC (Advanced) TX Logic Bus Start Bit

See Logic

See Logic See Logic See Logic

Configuration > PLC (Advanced) TX Logic Bus Start Length

See Logic

See Logic See Logic See Logic

Configuration > PLC (Advanced) RX Logic Bus Start Bit

See Logic

See Logic See Logic See Logic

Configuration > PLC (Advanced) RX Logic Bus Start Length

See Logic

See Logic See Logic See Logic

Page 157: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-17

User Interface Web Page (Path) Setting Name

Direct Transfer Trip (DTT)

Permissive Transfer Trip (PTT)

Direct Comparison Unblocking (DCUB)

DCUB with DTT (3F FSK)

Logic Options*

Configuration > Logic (Options) Reflected Power Alarm

Enable Enable Enable Enable

Configuration > Logic (Options) Trip Key 1 Input Polarity

Normal Normal Normal Normal

Configuration > Logic (Options) Trip Key 2 Input Polarity

Normal Normal Normal Normal

Configuration > Logic (Options) Transmit Mode 2F 2F 2F 3F

Configuration > Logic (Options) TX Trip 1 Shift Direction

Down Down Down Down

Configuration > Logic (Options) Trip Keying Priority Trip1 Trip1 Trip1 Trip1

Configuration > Logic (Options) Receive Mode 2F 2F 2F 3F

Configuration > Logic (Options) Unblock Trip 1 Disable Disable Enable Enable

Configuration > Logic (Options) Unblock Trip 2 Disable Disable Disable Disable

Configuration > Logic (Options) Trip 1 Output Polarity Normal Normal Normal Normal

Configuration > Logic (Options) Trip 2 Output Polarity Normal Normal Normal Normal

Configuration > Logic (Options) Guard Before Trip Enable Enable Enable Enable

Configuration > Logic (Options) Unblock On Low Level Alarm

Disable Disable Enable Enable

Configuration > Logic (Options) Unblock On SNR Alarm

Disable Disable Disable Disable

Configuration > Logic (Options) RX Alarm Enable Enable Enable Enable

Configuration > Logic (Options) RX Trip 1 Shift Direction

Down Down Down Down

Configuration > Logic (Options) RX Alarm Output Polarity

Normal Normal Normal Normal

Configuration > Logic (Options) TX Fail Output Polarity

Normal Normal Normal Normal

Configuration > Logic (Options) RPM Alarm Output Polarity

Normal Normal Normal Normal

Configuration > Logic (Options) RX Low Level Output Polarity

Normal Normal Normal Normal

Logic Timers*

Configuration > Logic (Timers) Trip Key 1 TX Delay/Extend

0/0 ms 0/0 ms 0/0 ms 0/0 ms

Configuration > Logic (Timers) Trip Key 2 TX Delay/Extend

0/0 ms 0/0 ms 0/0 ms 0/0 ms

Configuration > Logic (Timers) TX Fail Output Delay/Extend

50/50 ms 50/50 ms 50/50 ms 50/50 ms

Configuration > Logic (Timers) RX Trip 1 Pretrip Delay/Extend

2/0 ms 2/0 ms 2/0 ms 2/0 ms

Configuration > Logic (Timers) RX Guard Delay/Extend

4/10 ms 4/10 ms 4/10 ms 4/10 ms

Configuration > Logic (Timers) RX Trip 2 Pretrip Delay/Extend

2/0 ms 2/0 ms 2/0 ms 2/0 ms

Configuration > Logic (Timers) RX Guard Before Trip/Trip After Guard

100/100 ms 100/100 ms 100/100 ms 100/100 ms

Configuration > Logic (Timers) RX Alarm Output Delay/Extend

50/50 ms 50/50 ms 50/50 ms 50/50 ms

Page 158: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-18

User Interface Web Page (Path) Setting Name Direct Transfer Trip (DTT)

Permissive Transfer Trip (PTT)

Direct Comparison Unblocking (DCUB)

DCUB with DTT (3F FSK)

Configuration > Logic (Timers) Reflected Power Alarm Delay/Extend

50/50 ms 50/50 ms 50/50 ms 50/50 ms

Configuration > Logic (Timers) Unblock Security Delay/Extend

20/5 ms 20/5 ms 20/5 ms 20/5 ms

Configuration > Logic (Timers) Unblock Window Delay/Extend

170/50 ms 170/50 ms 170/50 ms 170/50 ms

Configuration > Logic (Timers) Counter 1 Delay/Extend

0.5/0.5 ms 0.5/0.5 ms 0.5/0.5 ms 0.5/0.5 ms

Configuration > Logic (Timers) Counter 2 Delay/Extend

0.5/0.5 ms 0.5/0.5 ms 0.5/0.5 ms 0.5/0.5 ms

Configuration > Logic (Timers) Counter 3 Delay/Extend

0.5/0.5 ms 0.5/0.5 ms 0.5/0.5 ms 0.5/0.5 ms

Configuration > Logic (Timers) Counter 4 Delay/Extend

0.5/0.5 ms 0.5/0.5 ms 0.5/0.5 ms 0.5/0.5 ms

Configuration > Logic (Timers) Counter 5 Delay/Extend

0.5/0.5 ms 0.5/0.5 ms 0.5/0.5 ms 0.5/0.5 ms

Configuration > Logic (Timers) Counter 6 Delay/Extend

0.5/0.5 ms 0.5/0.5 ms 0.5/0.5 ms 0.5/0.5 ms

Configuration > Logic (Timers) SNR Alarm Qualifying Delay/Extend

10/50 ms 10/50 ms 10/50 ms 10/50 ms

Configuration > Logic (Timers) TX Disable Delay/Extend

0/0 ms 0/0 ms 0/0 ms 0/0 ms

*Settings may vary by logic.

5.4.1.6 FSK Test

This page will allow the user to force the carrier signal to different frequencies. This can be

useful in troubleshooting, tuning auxiliary coupling equipment or measuring levels etc. Forcing

the carrier will cause the PLC module to go into minor alarm. This reminds the user that the

PLC is not in its “normal” state.

CAUTION:

Leaving the carrier on a different frequency will affect the operation of the unit and protection

of the system.

Always put the carrier back into the normal state before leaving the unit.

Menu location: Test > PLC > In this example 2F is selected.

Page 159: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-19

1 3 2 4

5

Figure 5-9. FSK Test

1. Force TX Carrier State: Forces the carrier to one of five states as follows: Normal

Operation, Force Off, Force On Low Frequency, Force On Center Frequency and Force

On High Frequency.

2. Activate: Click to activate a change in the carrier state. The following confirmation

window will display. Click “Send Command,” an additional confirmation window will

briefly display to indicate either success or failure of the change in state.

3. Current Force Carrier State: Once the carrier state has been changed and the

command sent and verified, the change in state will be displayed here.

4. These status settings (which are fixed) are derived from the FSK configuration web

page and displayed here for reference.

5. PLC Module Logic Bus Outputs: Enables or disables the Logic Bus Outputs. Once a

change is made click the “Activate” button to change the Logic Bus Output state.

5.4.2 On/Off Mode - Status, Configuration and Test

Clicking on the PLC On/Off module in the dashboard will display its status as shown below.

You can also navigate to the status page from the main navigation menu at the left of the web

page.

Page 160: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-20

5.4.2.1 On/Off Status

Menu location: Status > PLC

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

1415161819202122 17

Figure 5-10. On/Off Status

Transmitter:

1. Transmitter State: Indicates the transmitter state as follows:

“Block TX” or “Carrier Off.”

2. TX Power Level: Indicates the TX power output level of the PLC system in dBm

referenced to 50 Ωs or indicates “No TX Signal.”

3. TX Level Alarm: Indicates whether the transmitter is in alarm state as follows:

“TX Fail” or “No Alarm.”

4. Reflected Power: Records the reflected power as a percent or indicates “No TX

Signal.”

5. Reflected Power Level: Reports the reflected power level as follows:

“Excess Reflected Power” or “No Alarm.”

6. Current Force Carrier state: Indicates the force carrier state as follows:

“Normal Operation,” “Forced Off,” “Forced On.”

7. TX Frequency: Indicates the TX Block Frequency in kHz.

Checkback:

8. Checkback Mode: Indicates the checkback mode that is in use as follows: Master,

Remote or Disabled.

Page 161: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-21

9. Checkback Status: Will report the last checkback test as follows: Not Yet Performed,

Passed or Test x failed (where x is the number of the test, (1-8).

Receiver:

10. Receiver State: Indicates the receive state as follows:

“Block RX” or “No Carrier Received.”

11. RX Power Level: Reports the RX level in dB relative to the normal RX level set

during commissioning or “Alarm.”

12. SNR: Reports the SNR of the receive signal in dB or “No Carrier RX” or “Alarm.”

13. RX Frequency: Indicates the RX Block Frequency in kHz.

Counters Receiver:

14. Block RX Count: Indicates the block receive count

Checkback Test History:

15. Run Count: Indicates the total checkback run count.

16. Pass Count: Indicates the total checkback pass count.

17. Fail Count: Indicates the total checkback fail count.

Counters Receiver:

18. Start 1 Count: Indicates the “Start 1” key count.

19. Start 2 Count: Indicates the “Start 2” key count.

20. Stop 1 Count: Indicates the “Stop 1” key count.

21. Stop 2 Count: Indicates the “Stop 2” key count.

22. Reserve Key Count: Indicates the “Reserve” key count.

Page 162: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-22

5.4.2.2 On/Off Configuration – General

Menu location: Configuration > PLC (General).

Ensure that the “General” tab is clicked. If not already enabled, the module should be enabled

by clicking the ON/OFF button.

Note:

Once all the settings are complete click the “Save” button at the bottom right of the web page to

make the settings permanent.

1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9

11131210

6

Figure 5-11. On/Off Configuration

Transmitter:

1. TX Block Frequency: Sets the TX block frequency from 30kHz to 500kHz in

0.125kHz increments.

2. TX Reserve Level: Sets the TX reserve level. The selections are 1W, 3W or 10W.

3. TX Block Level: Sets the TX block level. The selections are 1W, 3W or 10W.

4. Local TX Causes Block: Check to generate a local block when a block is transmitted

to the far end.

5. TX Filter Settings: Click this button to show jumper settings required for allocated

frequency ranges.

Page 163: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-23

Transmitter Alarm:

6. Reflected Power Alarm Threshold: Sets the threshold above which the RPM alarm is

generated. The range is from 0% to 50% in 1% increments.

Receiver:

7. RX Block Frequency: Sets the RX block frequency from 30kHz to 500kHz in

0.125kHz increments.

8. RX Bandwidth: There are three settings available in On/Off mode: 500, 1000 or

1500Hz.

9. Block Hold Timer: This setting delays the dropout of the block output after the

blocking signal is lost. This delay can be set in the range of 0 to 50ms in increments of

1ms. The recommended default setting is 10ms. The timer increases the reliability of

the blocking receiver by preventing an intermittent loss of carrier. This loss can be

caused by arc gap flashover which would allow the protective relay to over-trip for an

external fault condition.

Start/Stop Logic:

10. Start Logic: Sets the polarity for the “Stop 1” and “Stop 2” input contacts. Can be set

to Normal or Inverted. When set to Normal, the contact is active when the station

battery voltage is present, and is inactive when the station battery voltage is not

present. When set to Inverted, the contact is inactive when the station battery voltage

is present, and is active when the station battery voltage is not present.

11. Start Logic – Start 1 or Start 2: Selects whether the “Start 1” and “Start 2” contacts

are ANDed or ORed. The options are “And” or “Or.”

12. Stop Logic: Sets the polarity for the “Start 1” and “Start 2” input contacts. Can be set

to Normal or Inverted. When set to Normal, the contact is active when the station

battery voltage is present, and is inactive when the station battery voltage is not

present. When set to Inverted, the contact is inactive when the station battery voltage

is present, and is active when the station battery voltage is not present.

13. Stop Logic – Stop 1 or Stop 2: Selects whether the “Stop 1” and “Stop 2” contacts

are ANDed or ORed. The options are “And” or “Or.”

Page 164: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-24

5.4.2.3 On/Off Configuration – Advanced

Menu location: Configuration > PLC (Advanced). The On/Off function button will be

selected.

Note:

The following settings are for advanced users only. HPS/RFL recommends that the factory be

contacted before any changes are made to this web page.

1 2 3 4 5 Advanced tabFunction Buttons 6 7 8 9

Figure 5-12. On/Off Configuration, Advanced

1. Discriminator Energy Threshold: This setting indicates the differential in signal level

between guard and trip frequencies required to declare a change of state. Should be set

to 15dB for proper operation. The range is from 0dB to 100dB in 1dB increments.

2. RX AGC Setpoint: Determines the headroom allowed in the analog section of the

receiver when commissioned. Should be set to 30.

3. Minimum Receive Level: Set to the minimum level that should be considered a valid

block, relative to the block level at commissioning. For example; to reject carrier

signals more than 15dB below nominal. Set the Min. RX Level to 15.

4. Trip RX Threshold: Not applicable for On/Off applications.

Page 165: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-25

Continued……

5. Guard RX Threshold: Not applicable for On/Off applications.

CAUTION Changing the following bit range settings will affect system logic Refer to the System Logic PDF for help with the following settings.

6. TX Logic Bus Start Bit: The range of TX logic bus start bits can be set from 3 to 511

in increments of 1.

7. TX Logic Bus Length: The TX logic bus length can be set from 0 to 24 in increments

of 1.

8. RX Logic Bus Start Bit: The range of RX logic bus start bits can be set from 3 to 511

in increments of 1.

9. RX Logic Bus Length: The RX logic bus length can be set from 0 to 24 in increments

of 1.

5.4.2.4 Recommended On/Off Settings

RFL recommends the following settings for most standard PLC On/Off applications. Be aware

that the “Logic Options” and “Logic Timer” settings may vary by logic.

Table 5-9 Recommended On/Off Settings

User Interface Web Page (Path) Setting Name Direct Comparison Blocking (DCB)

Configuration > PLC> (General) Module Enable ON

Transmitter

Configuration > PLC> (General) TX Block Frequency -

Configuration > PLC> (General) TX Reserve Level 1 W

Configuration > PLC> (General) TX Block Level 10 W

Configuration > PLC> (General) Local Tx Causes Block Yes

Configuration > PLC> (General) Reflected Power Alarm Threshold 20%

Receiver

Configuration > PLC> (General) RX Block Frequency -

Configuration > PLC> (General) RX Bandwidth 1000 Hz

Configuration > PLC> (General) Block Hold Timer 3 ms

Start/Stop Polarity

Configuration > PLC> (General) Start 1 Polarity Normal

Configuration > PLC> (General) Start 2 Polarity Normal

Configuration > PLC> (General) Start Logic Or

Configuration > PLC> (General) Stop 1 Polarity Normal

Configuration > PLC> (General) Stop 2 Polarity Normal

Configuration > PLC> (General) Stop Logic Or

Advanced

Configuration > PLC> (Advanced) Function On/Off

Configuration > PLC> (Advanced) Discriminator Energy Threshold 15

Page 166: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-26

User Interface Web Page (Path) Setting Name Direct Comparison Blocking (DCB)

Configuration > PLC> (Advanced) RX AGC Setpoint 30

Configuration > PLC> (Advanced) Min RX Level 15

Configuration > PLC> (Advanced) Not applicable -

Configuration > PLC> (Advanced) TX Logic Bus Start Bit See Logic

Configuration > PLC> (Advanced) TX Logic Bus Start Length See Logic

Configuration > PLC> (Advanced) RX Logic Bus Start Bit See Logic

Configuration > PLC> (Advanced) RX Logic Bus Start Length See Logic

Logic Options*

Configuration > Logic (Options) Checkback TIP Output Polarity Normal

Configuration > Logic (Options) Checkback Fail Output Polarity Normal

Configuration > Logic (Options) Reflected Power Alarm Output Pol. Normal

Configuration > Logic (Options) Tx Fail Alarm Output Polarity Normal

Logic Timers*

Configuration > Logic (Timers) Checkback TIP Delay/Extend 0/3000 ms

Configuration > Logic (Timers) Checkback Fail Delay/Extend 100/100 ms

Configuration > Logic (Timers) Reflected Power Alarm Delay/Extend 50/50 ms

Configuration > Logic (Timers) TX Fail Output Delay/Extend 50/50 ms

Configuration > Logic (Timers) Start 1 SOE Delay/Extend 2/2 ms

Configuration > Logic (Timers) Start 2 SOE Delay/Extend 2/2 ms

Configuration > Logic (Timers) Stop 1 SOE Delay/Extend 2/2 ms

Configuration > Logic (Timers) Stop 2 SOE Delay/Extend 2/2 ms

Configuration > Logic (Timers) Reserve Key SOE Delay/Extend 2/2 ms

Configuration > Logic (Timers) Remote Init SOE Delay/Extend 2/2 ms

Configuration > Logic (Timers) Counter 1 Delay/Extend 0.5/0.5 ms

Configuration > Logic (Timers) Counter 2 Delay/Extend 0.5/0.5 ms

Configuration > Logic (Timers) Counter 3 Delay/Extend 0.5/0.5 ms

Configuration > Logic (Timers) Counter 4 Delay/Extend 0.5/0.5 ms

Configuration > Logic (Timers) Counter 5 Delay/Extend 0.5/0.5 ms

Configuration > Logic (Timers) Counter 6 Delay/Extend 0.5/0.5 ms

*Settings may vary by logic.

Page 167: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-27

5.4.2.5 On/Off Configuration – Checkback

Menu location: Configuration > PLC (Checkback).

The following web page has all the settings required for end-to-end checkback testing in On/Off

mode. Ensure that the function buttons are set correctly.

Note:

One end must be set to “Master” and the other end set to “Remote,” or both ends must be set to

“Disabled” if the checkback feature is not being used.

1 2 3

45

Checkback tab Function Buttons

6

Figure 5-13. On/Off Configuration, Checkback

1. Max. Delay for Remote Response: Sets the checkback response time-out in seconds.

Can be set from 0-100 in one second intervals.

2. Time: Start Time of First Test: Sets the ‘real time’ start time in hours and minutes

when the checkback sequence will be initiated. Can be set for 0-23 in 1hr increments

and 0-59 in 1 minute increments.

3. Interval: Repeat Test Every: Sets the time between automatically initiated checkback

sequence. Can be set from 0-24 in 1 hour increments.

Checkback Test Codes:

4. Checkback test 1 through 8 Command and Response:

Command: This is the code sent from the Master station to the Remote station. Valid

codes are 1-16 or Off.

Page 168: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-28

Response: The code sent from the Remote station to the Master station in response to a

command. Valid codes are 1-16 or Off.

5. Remote Checkback Initiate: In Master mode the checkback sequence is initiated in

response to this code.

In Remote mode this code is sent to the Master to request the checkback sequence.

Selections are 1-16, or Off. The recommended setting is 16.

Note:

When switching between Master and Remote modes it may be necessary to restart the

front PLC module to clear pre-existing alarms.

6. Command TX Level: Can be set for high or low for checkback test 1 through 8. High

is the “TX Block Level” and Low is the “TX Reserve Level” see 5.4.2.2.

5.4.2.5.1 Recommended Checkback Settings (Two Terminal)

RFL recommends the following settings for most standard PLC Checkback Two-Terminal line

testing operations. Following the table below are the recommended settings for Three-Terminal

operation.

Master Remote

Station A Station B

Table 5-10 Recommended Checkback Settings, 2-Terminal Line Testing

User Interface Web Page (Path) Setting Name Station A Station B

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Enable/Mode Master Remote

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Max Delay for Remote Response 30 s 30 s

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Start Time 6:00 6:00

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Interval 24 h 24 h

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Test 1 Command 1 1

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Test 1 Response 1 1

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Test 1 TX Level High High

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Test 2 Command 2 2

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Test 2 Response 2 2

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Test 2 TX Level Low Low

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Test 3 Command Off Off

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Test 3 Response Off Off

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Test 3 TX Level Low Low

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Test 4 Command Off Off

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Test 4 Response Off Off

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Test 4 TX Level Low Low

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Test 5 Command Off Off

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Test 5 Response Off Off

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Test 5 TX Level Low Low

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Test 6 Command Off Off

Page 169: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-29

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Test 6 Response Off Off

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Test 6 TX Level Low Low

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Test 7 Command Off Off

User Interface Web Page (Path) Setting Name Station A Station B

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Test 7 Response Off Off

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Test 7 TX Level Low Low

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Test 8 Command Off Off

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Test 8 Response Off Off

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Test 8 TX Level Low Low

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Remote Checkback Initiate 16 16

5.4.2.5.2 Recommended Checkback Settings (Three Terminal)

RFL recommends the following settings for most standard PLC Checkback Three-Terminal line

testing operations.

Master Remote

Station A Station C

Remote

Station B

Table 5-11 Recommended Checkback Settings, 3-Terminal Line Testing

User Interface Web Page (Path) Setting Name Station A Station B Station C

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Enable/Mode Master Remote Remote

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Max Delay for Remote Response 30 s 30 s 30 s

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Start Time 6:00 6:00 6:00

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Interval 24 h 24 h 24 h

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Test 1 Command 1 1 Off

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Test 1 Response 1 1 Off

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Test 1 TX Level High High Low

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Test 2 Command 2 2 Off

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Test 2 Response 2 2 Off

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Test 2 TX Level Low Low Low

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Test 3 Command 3 Off 3

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Test 3 Response 3 Off 3

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Test 3 TX Level High Low High

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Test 4 Command 4 Off 4

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Test 4 Response 4 Off 4

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Test 4 TX Level Low Low Low

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Test 5 Command Off Off Off

Page 170: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-30

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Test 5 Response Off Off Off

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Test 5 TX Level Low Low Low

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Test 6 Command Off Off Off

User Interface Web Page (Path) Setting Name Station A Station B Station C

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Test 6 Response Off Off Off

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Test 6 TX Level Low Low Low

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Test 7 Command Off Off Off

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Test 7 Response Off Off Off

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Test 7 TX Level Low Low Low

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Test 8 Command Off Off Off

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Test 8 Response Off Off Off

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Test 8 TX Level Low Low Low

Configuration > PLC> (Checkback) Remote Checkback Initiate 16 16 16

5.4.2.6 On-Off Configuration – Hard Carrier

Menu location: Configuration > PLC (HardCarrier).

1

2

Hard Carrier tab

3

Figure 5-14. On/Off Configuration, Hard Carrier

Page 171: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-31

Hard Carrier Request:

1. Request Number Code: The code sent to the Remote end to request a hard carrier

response. The code can be sent using the following test page. Selections are 1-16 or

Off.

Hard Carrier Response:

2. Code: A low or high power response is sent if the selected code is received. Selections

are 1-16, or Off.

3. Response Time: Sets the duration of the hard carrier response. Can be set from 0 to

180 seconds in 1 second increments.

5.4.2.6.1 Recommended Hard Carrier Settings (Two Terminal)

RFL recommends the following settings for most standard PLC Hard Carrier Two-Terminal

line testing operations. Following the table below are the recommended settings for Three-

Terminal operation.

Master Remote

Station A Station B

Table 5-12 Recommended Hard Carrier Settings, 2-Terminal Line Testing

User Interface Web Page (Path) Setting Name Station A Station B

Configuration > PLC (HardCarrier) Request TX Hard Carrier Code A 11 13

Configuration > PLC (HardCarrier) Request TX Hard Carrier Code B 12 14

Configuration > PLC (HardCarrier) Request TX Hard Carrier Code C Off Off

Configuration > PLC (HardCarrier) Request TX Hard Carrier Code D Off Off

Configuration > PLC (HardCarrier) Response Code Low 13 11

Configuration > PLC (HardCarrier) Response Code High 14 12

Configuration > PLC (HardCarrier) Response Time 30 s 30 s

Page 172: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-32

5.4.2.6.2 Recommended Hard Carrier Settings (Three Terminal)

RFL recommends the following settings for most standard PLC Hard Carrier Three-Terminal

line testing operations.

Master Remote

Station A Station C

Remote

Station B

Table 5-13 Recommended Hard Carrier Settings, 3-Terminal Line Testing

User Interface Web Page (Path) Setting Name Station A Station B Station C

Configuration > PLC (HardCarrier) Request TX Hard Carrier Code A 10 12 10

Configuration > PLC (HardCarrier) Request TX Hard Carrier Code B 11 13 11

Configuration > PLC (HardCarrier) Request TX Hard Carrier Code C 14 14 12

Configuration > PLC (HardCarrier) Request TX Hard Carrier Code D 15 15 13

Configuration > PLC (HardCarrier) Response Code Low 12 10 14

Configuration > PLC (HardCarrier) Response Code High 13 11 15

Configuration > PLC (HardCarrier) Response Time 30 s 30 s 30 s

Page 173: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-33

5.4.2.7 On-Off Test

This page will allow the user to force the carrier signal to either “On” or “Off.” This can be

useful in troubleshooting, tuning auxiliary coupling equipment or measuring levels etc. Forcing

the carrier will cause the PLC module to go into minor alarm. This reminds the user that the

PLC is not in its “normal” state.

Note:

Remember to always put the carrier back into the normal state before leaving the unit.

Menu location: Test > PLC

1 3 2 4

567 8

Figure 5-15. On/Off Test

1. Force TX Carrier State: Forces the carrier to one of three states as follows: Normal

Operation, Force On or Force Off.

2. Activate: Click to activate a change in the carrier state. The following confirmation

window will display. Click “Send Command,” an additional confirmation window will

briefly display to indicate either success or failure of the change in state.

3. Current Force Carrier State: Once the carrier state has been changed and the

command sent and verified, the change in state will be displayed here.

Page 174: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-34

These status indicators (which are fixed) are derived from the On/Off configuration web

page and displayed here for reference.

4. Send Checkback Code: Sends the selected checkback code to the far end as follows:

1-16 or none. Click the “Send” button. A confirmation window will appear, click

“Send Command.”

Click to send the Remote Initiate code to the Master end.

5. PLC Module Logic Bus Outputs: Enables or disables the Logic Bus Outputs. Once a

change is made click the “Activate” button to change the Logic Bus Output state.

6. Send Hard Carrier: Sends the selected hard carrier request to the far end. The

selections are 1 to 4 or none. Once selected click “Send.”

5.4.3 Receiver Operating Range and Dynamic Range

RX AGC Setpoint setting Sets headroom in

the analog portion of receiver. Set to 30 dB

Nominal Trip Level (Boost)

Nominal Guard Level

Maximum receiver sensitivity 25 Vrms

Signal Dropout Alarm (FSK only)

Min RX Level Setting On/Off = -15dB/FSK = -11dB

For On/Off determines max inst. drop from nominal to block

For FSK determines max inst. drop from nominal to trip

+30 dB

+10 dB

0 dB

Maximum receiver sensitivity 5 mVrms

-10 dB

-11 dB

-25 dB

Dynamic

Range

FSK Trip RX Threshold (FSK Only) Absolute minimum

level required to trip. Recommended setting 25 dB

(Range 0 dB to 100 dB)

Receiver

Operating

Range

SNR Alarm Threshold (FSK Only) Issues an alarm, and disables tripping for noise levels exceeding the ratio setting.

Recommended setting 10 dB (0 dB to 30 dB range)

Figure 5-16. Receiver Operating Range and Dynamic Range

Page 175: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-35

5.5 Power Line Carrier Commissioning

5.5.1 Introduction

The HPS/RFL GARD Pro system with PLC is factory-configured as a 50-ohm power line

carrier terminal. If 50-ohm termination is being used, then the Receiver Calibration is typically

the only commissioning procedure required in the field.

This section is broken down into two parts: User interface calibrations, which require a PC

connected to the management port of the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system PLC and rear module

adjustments, which are made on the amplifier module. Below is a complete list of calibrations

and adjustment procedures:

- User-interface calibrations:

Receive level calibration (user interface, field calibration procedure)

Transmit power level measurement calibration(user interface, factory-set at 50-ohm)

Reflected power measurement calibration (user interface, factory-set at 50-ohm)

- Rear-module adjustments:

Impedance adjustment (rear module, factory-set at 50-ohm)

Transmit power level adjustment (rear module, factory-set at 50-ohm)

Transmit fail level adjustment (rear module, factory-set at 28.5dBm, 50-ohm)

Skewed hybrid tuning (rear module, factory-set at 50-ohm)

The following pages will describe calibration procedures initiated through the user interface:

WARNING!

Not using the correct dummy load will affect calibration.

When running the TX Monitor or Reflected Power Monitor level procedures the transmitter

MUST be terminated into a 50Ω non-inductive dummy load.

Page 176: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-36

5.5.2 Calibrations through the User Interface

Menu location: Test > Calibrate.

The following example web page is for FSK applications. ON/OFF applications are similar but

not shown. As shown below, clicking on the listed calibration procedure will display the

required steps to complete the procedure.

Note:

The “Receiver Auto-Set” procedure should be performed in the field. Follow the step-for-step

calibration procedures as required.

This procedure should be

performed in the field

These procedures are factory set

Figure 5-17. PLC Calibration

Page 177: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-37

Table 5-14. PLC Calibration

Description When

Receive Auto-Set Sets up the PLC unit for optimum

performance on a particular PLC channel.

Once the channel has been optimized, this

procedure calibrates the PLC for the

nominal carrier receive level (0 dB),

setting up operation of things like front-

panel CLI meter, Rx alarms, etc.

This procedure is the most commonly run calibration procedure

and is typically the only one that needs to be done in the field. It

should be run:

- Any time there is a change made to the PLC system which

affects the carrier receive level

- At commissioning, after all channel elements (traps, tuners,

hybrids, etc.) have been installed and tuned.

Set TX Monitor Level Calibrates the “TX Power Level”

indication on the Status page and as

reported over DNP.

This is a factory-calibration procedure. This procedure is

typically not done in the field. It is factory-set for 50-ohm

applications

Set Reflected Power Monitor Level Calibrates the “Reflected Power Level”

indication on the Status page and as

reported over DNP.

This is a factory-calibration procedure. This procedure is

typically not done in the field. It is factory-set for 50-ohm

applications.

5.5.2.1 Running Receive Auto-Set

The procedure is displayed in the GUI under PLC calibration: TEST-> Calibrate PLC

5.5.3 Rear Module Adjustments

5.5.3.1 Equipment Requirements

The following equipment is required to perform the commissioning procedure:

Frequency-selective voltmeter (FSVM). Signalcrafters, PowerComm, etc.

Small Flat-head screwdriver (pot tweaker)

50-ohm load or dummy load (minimum 10W rating)

Adjustments are made to the PLC Analog Module rear panel as shown below.

Page 178: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-38

CA

UT

ION

ST

AT

ICS

EN

SIT

IVER

13 A

MP

IMP

ED

AD

J

R8

AM

P G

AIN

AD

J

R19

TX

FA

ILA

DJ

PA

OU

T

RX

IN

FIN

E

CO

AR

SE

TX

/RX

2W

TX

4W

RX

GN

D

+15V

-15V

GN

DC

LI

Connect dummy load

Common test point (black)

RX in test point

(yellow)

Power amp out test

point (red)

Common test point (black)

R13 Amp impedance adjust

R19 Amp TX fail adjust

R8 Amp gain adjust

R46

S1

Figure 5-18. PLC Rear Module Adjustments

5.5.3.2 Verifying/Adjusting Amplifier Output Impedance

Perform the fine adjustments to precisely match impedance and minimize the reflected power.

The HPS/RFL GARD Pro system PLC amplifier output impedance is factory-set for 50-ohm

impedance.

When the load and source impedance are precisely matched, the loaded output voltage is

exactly one-half of the unloaded output voltage (or, the loaded output is 6dB below the

unloaded output). This fact is used to fine-tune the output impedance of the PLC amplifier.

Proceed with the following steps.

1. Remove the rear PLC board and find jumpers J35/J36. Set the jumpers to “TEST”

and re-insert the module.

2. Send a “Guard” signal (FSK) or “Block” (On/Off) at 1W.

Note:

Set block level to 1W (On/Off), otherwise send 1W Guard (FSK)

3. Disconnect the load from the amplifier.

4. Set the frequency-selective voltmeter (FSVM) to the transmit frequency and

measure the transmit output level across the “PA-OUT” (red and black) test points

on the rear PLC board. Either record the value, or set the meter’s 0 dB reference to

the currently measured value.

5. Re-connect the load, continuing to measure the transmit output level.

6. Adjust the potentiometer R13 on the rear of the amplifier module to achieve 50% of

the previously measured voltage, (or to achieve 6dB below the previously measured

level).

7. Remove the rear PLC board and set jumpers J35/J36 to “NORM”.

Page 179: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-39

5.5.3.3 Verifying/Adjusting the Transmit Output Power

The PLC amplifier output power level is factory-set for +30dBm (1W) and +40dBm (10W) into

a 50-ohm impedance. This procedure describes how to verify the transmit output power, and

how to make adjustments (if required).

1. Connect the TX port of the PLC to a 50-ohm load.

2. Measure the transmit output level using an FSVM across the “PA-OUT” (red and

black) test points on the power amplifier module.

3. Key the transmitter at 10W using the keying inputs or the input test pages

(See 4.7.1.4)

4. Measure +40dBm (10W at 50-ohm) on the FSVM. If the reading is not +40dBm,

adjust the potentiometer R8 on the rear of the amplifier module to achieve +40dBm

(22.26Vrms).

The procedure is complete. The transmitter levels are now verified / adjusted for 1W and/or

10W.

5.5.3.4 Transmit Fail Adjustment

The PLC amplifier output transmit fail (“TX Fail”) level is factory-set for +28.5dBm into a 50-

ohm impedance. This is typically sufficient for most applications. The TX Fail alarm will go

active if the transmitter output fails below this level. If a different TX Fail level is desired, this

procedure describes how to verify/adjust the TX Fail level.

1. Connect the FSVM to the PA OUT Test Points on the Analog Module and tune the

FSVM for the TX frequency.

2. Send Guard (In FSK) or Block (On/Off) at 1W (30dBm).

3. Adjust R8 on the Power Amplifier until the desired TX Fail Threshold is shown on

the FSVM.

Note:

RFL recommends setting the threshold to 1.5dB below the Guard or Block Signal

level (28.5dBm).

4. Adjust the TX Fail Threshold pot (R19) of the Power Amplifier until the TX Fail

Output turns on.

5. Adjust the Gain pot (R8) on the Power Amplifier until the nominal TX level is

shown on the FSVM.

6. Confirm TX Fail Output is OFF.

5.5.3.5 Hybrid Tuning Procedure (If Equipped)

The PLC internal skewed hybrid is factory-set for a 50-ohm impedance. So long as the

termination impedance is 50-ohm, no adjustment should be necessary. This procedure

describes how to verify the skewed hybrid operation, and how to make adjustments (if

required). The purpose of tuning the PLC internal skewed hybrid is to match the transmit

impedance to the line tuner impedance, in order to minimize reflected power. The skewed

Page 180: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-40

hybrid also provides isolation between the TX and RX signals, while coupling the transmitter to

the line with minimal loss.

1. Install the amplifier module on a card extender (Part No.500940).

2. Verify that jumpers J12 through J15 do not have jumpers installed.

J12J13

J14

J15

Figure 5-19. PLC Verifying Jumpers J12 through J15

Page 181: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-41

3. Verify that jumpers J16 through J20 are installed.

J16

J17

L4

J18

J19

J20

Figure 5-20. PLC Verifying Jumpers J16 through J20

4. Verify that jumper J24 is set to “Isolate”.

Page 182: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-42

5. Verify that jumpers J21, J22, and J25 are set to “IN”.

6.

C

ON

NE

CT

ISO

LA

TE

J24

J21

J22

J25

Figure 5-21. PLC Verifying Jumpers J21 through J25

7. Set the FSVM to the transmit frequency, monitor the RX-IN test points (yellow and

black) on the amplifier module.

8. Adjust S1 (coarse) and R46 (fine) for a minimum reading on the FSVM.

9. Insert jumpers J12 through J15 in increasing combinations of capacitance until a

combination is found which achieves a minimum reading on the FSVM.

10. Remove J17 and adjust L4 for fine tuning until a minimum reading on the FSVM is

achieved. If necessary remove jumpers J16 through J20 until a combination is found

which achieves a minimum reading on the FSVM.

11. The adjustment is complete. Remove the amplifier module from the extender card and

install in the chassis.

Page 183: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-43

5.5.4 Setting the Transmit Carrier Frequency Range

The operating band transmit carrier frequency is normally factory set, however if changes are

required in the field the following settings may be followed.

The operating band of the PLC is from 30kHz to 500kHz. Jumpers J3 through J11 on the

Analog Module can be set to accomplish the desired frequency range. Note that the circuit

board has been revised with the addition of jumpers J38, J39 and J40. TABLE 6-4 gives the

assembly numbers for the new Analog Module Assembly with various operating options

followed by the jumper settings to achieve the required frequency range. TABLE 6-3 gives the

assembly numbers for the old board followed by the jumper settings to achieve the required

frequency range.

Note:

On the old board the 393.5kHz to 500kHz version has no jumper settings.

J5

J6

J3

J4

J11

J7J8J9J10J39* J38*

J40*

* Jumpers added on revised circuit board

Figure 5-22. PLC Jumper Settings, Transmit Carrier Frequency Range

Page 184: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-44

Table 5-15. PLC Analog Module Assembly Part Numbers (500935-X, New Board)

New Assembly Numbers

Frequency Range (kHz)

Output Impedance (Ohms)

Internal Skewed Hybrid

TX RX

500935 30-500 50 X X X

500935-2 30-500 75 X X X

500935-4 (External Amp)

30-500 N/A X X X

500935-10 30-500 50 X X

500935-20 30-500 50 X

500935-22 30-500 75 X

500935-30 30-500 N/A X

Table 5-16. TX Filter Jumper settings (500935-X, New Board)

Frequency (Passband)

Range in kHz

Jumper Position

J3 J4 J5 J6 J7 J8 J9 J10 J11 J38/J39/

J40

30-41.5 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2

38-52.5 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 1-2

49-67.5 13-14 5-6, 7-8, 9-10

5-6, 7-8, 9-10

5-6, 7-8, 9-10

13-14 5-6, 7-8, 9-10

5-6, 7-8, 9-10

5-6, 7-8, 9-10

13-14 1-2

64-88.5 15-16 5-6, 7-8

5-6, 7-8

5-6, 7-8

15-16 5-6, 7-8

5-6, 7-8

5-6, 7-8

15-16 1-2

85-117.5 17-18 7-8, 9-10

7-8, 9-10

7-8, 9-10

17-18 7-8, 9-10

7-8, 9-10

7-8, 9-10

17-18 1-2

114-157.5 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 1-2

154-212.5 7-8 7-8 7-8 7-8 7-8 7-8 7-8 7-8 7-8 1-2

209-288.5 9-10 9-10 9-10 9-10 9-10 9-10 9-10 9-10 9-10 1-2

285-393.5 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 1-2

390-500 11-12 13-14 13-14 13-14 11-12 13-14 13-14 13-14 11-12 2-3

Continued……..

Page 185: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-45

Table 5-17. PLC Analog Module Assembly Part Numbers (500930-X, Old Board)

Old Assembly Numbers

Frequency Range (kHz)

Output Impedance (Ohms)

Internal Skewed Hybrid

TX RX

500930 30-392 50 X X X

500930-1 390-500 50 X X X

500930-2 30-392 75 X X X

500930-3 390-500 75 X X X

500930-4 (External Amp)

30-500 N/A X X X

500930-10 30-392 50 - X X

500930-11 (On/Off Only)

392-500 50 - X X

500930-20 30-392 50 - X -

500930-21 392-500 50 - X -

500930-22 30-392 75 - X -

500930-23 392-500 75 - X -

500930-30 30-500 N/A - - X

Table 5-18. TX Filter Jumper settings (500930-X, Old Board)

Frequency (Passband)

Range in kHz

Jumper Position

J3 J4 J5 J6 J7 J8 J9 J10 J11

30-41.5 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2

38-52.5 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4

49-67.5 13-14 5-6, 7-8, 9-10

5-6, 7-8, 9-10

5-6, 7-8, 9-10

13-14 5-6, 7-8, 9-10

5-6, 7-8, 9-10

5-6, 7-8, 9-10

13-14

64-88.5 15-16 5-6, 7-8

5-6, 7-8

5-6, 7-8

15-16 5-6, 7-8

5-6, 7-8

5-6, 7-8

15-16

85-117.5 17-18 7-8, 9-10

7-8, 9-10

7-8, 9-10

17-18 7-8, 9-10

7-8, 9-10

7-8, 9-10

17-18

114-157.5 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6

154-212.5 7-8 7-8 7-8 7-8 7-8 7-8 7-8 7-8 7-8

209-288.5 9-10 9-10 9-10 9-10 9-10 9-10 9-10 9-10 9-10

285-393.5 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12

5.5.5 Carrier Level Indicator Settings

The PLC has a carrier level indicator output for use with external measuring devices such as a

panel meter or an analog RTU input. The value at this output represents a variance in received

signal level from the initial signal level when the unit was commissioned. The output is an

analog value that is at mid-scale when the commissioned level is being received. It is above

mid-scale for higher levels and below mid-scale for lower levels.

Page 186: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-46

The output is a voltage output with one of three jumper selectable resistors in series with it.

When attached to the proper load, the current swings over the designated range.

J32J33J34

Figure 5-23. PLC Analog Module, Carrier Level Indicator Modes - Jumpers

Install a jumper for the required setting as shown below and in the following table. When a

jumper is installed the other two jumpers must be empty (uninstalled).

Note:

The CLI output levels are calibrated during the receiver commissioning procedure and no

further adjustments are necessary or possible.

The three jumper settings are as follows:

The “0-5V” jumper position (J32) puts a 5K ohm resistor in the circuit. When

connected to a high impedance volt meter the resistor is insignificant and the output is

2.5 volts at mid-scale. The scale is 0.25V/dB and the resolution is 1dB. This means

that a signal 6dB higher than commissioned level will result in an output of 4.00 volts.

Similarly, a drop of 6dB will result in an output of 1.00 volts. The maximum scale is

+/- 10dB or 5.00V to 0V.

The “0-1 mA” jumper position (J34) is designed for panel meters with an input load

of 5k Ohms. The full scale output of 5V through 5Kohms will result in 1mA. There is

a 50 ohm resistor in the output circuit to protect against short circuits. The scale will

effectively be 0.05mA/dB.

The “0-100 µA” jumper position (J33) is designed for low impedance current sensors.

Full scale will result in 5V/50Kohms or 100µA. The scale will effectively be 5µA/dB.

Continued……..

Page 187: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-47

Table 5-19. Carrier Level Indicator loads

Input signal

Output voltage

0-5V position, high impedance

load (J32)

0-1mA position, 5K load

(J33)

0-100 µA position, low impedance load

(J34)

+10dB 5.0V 5.0V 1.00mA 100µA

+6dB 4.0V 4.0V 0.80mA 80µA

+3dB 3.25V 3.25V 0.65mA 65µA

Nominal 2.5V 2.5V 0.50mA 50µA

-3dB 1.75V 1.75V 0.35mA 35µA

-6dB 1.00V 1.00V 0.20mA 20µA

-10dB 0.0V 0.0V 0mA 0µA

5.5.5.1 Carrier Level Indicator Meter Tuning

The Offset and Scale potentiometers on the PLC Digital Module are factory set and should not

normally need adjustment. However, if changes are made to either the digital board or CLI

meter the scale can be reset as shown below.

Offset Potentiometer

Scale Potentiometer

J6

Figure 5-24. Location of Potentiometers on Digital PLC Module

CAUTION Incorrect CLI calibration

This adjustment should only occur after the receive commissioning procedure has been

completed, see 5.5.2.1

Page 188: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-48

1. Set the RX level to a non 0dB level relative to nominal (the further from 0dB

without exceeding the range of the meter the better).

2. Adjust R237 (Scale) such that the meter displays the relative level of the RX

signal.

1

2

3

4

J6

Figure 5-25. J6 Pin Numbers

Page 189: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-49

5.6 Configuring 50 and 100W applications with Optional 9508 RF Chassis

The HPS/RFL 9508 RF Chassis, used with the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system PLC, amplifies the

RF outputs of the PLC before they are passed to the line coupling equipment. The HPS/RFL

9508 RF Chassis shown below develops 50 Watts PEP. For 100 Watt applications, two 50 watt

power amplifiers are required and are mounted as shown.

Note: The HPS/RFL GARD Pro system should be configured with the PLC Analog Module

500930-4 or 500935-4.

NET

RESET PWR

RECEIVE LEVEL

dB

1U Minimum space

RFL™ GARD Pro™ System PLC with 50W RF Chassis

Additional 50W Chassis for 100W Applications

Figure 5-26. 9508 RF Chassis Mounted on the HPS/RFL GARD Pro System

Page 190: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-50

Note:

All Illustrations are shown with a 3U HPS/RFL GARD Pro system PLC Chassis, the most

common configuration. The 9508 RF Chassis may be similarly used with a 6U HPS/RFL

GARD Pro system chassis.

The following modules are included in the HPS/RFL 9508 RF chassis. The RX Connection

Board can be used in place of the RX Filter.

Table 5-20. Modules Included in the 9508 RF Chassis

Module Assembly Number For Additional Information Refer To The Following Paragraphs:

50W Power Amplifier 103085 5.6.1

Power Amp Power Supply 107250-4, -5 5.6.2

TX Filter 107825 5.6.3

Balance Board 107815 5.6.4

External Amp Connection Board 107870 5.6.4

Line Board 103090-1 5.6.5

RX Filter 107820 5.6.6

RX Connection Board 107820-1 5.6.7

Attenuator Board 107810 5.6.8

RF Motherboard 103095 5.6.9

Page 191: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-51

Refer to the figure below for module locations. The 50W Power Amp is mounted on the 9508

front door and is not shown for clarity. Refer to the next page for the RF chassis block

diagram.

RX

CONNECTION BOARD OR RX FILTER

ATTENUATOR

LINE

BOARD

BALANCE

BOARD

TX

FILTER

POWER AMP

POWER SUPPLY

MOTHER

BOARD

50W POWER AMP

(Mounted on front door,

not shown for clarity)

Figure 5-27. Front View of the 9508 RF Chassis Showing Module Locations in 50W System

Page 192: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-52

2W

/4W

OU

T

J

7

4W

IN

J

6

PO

WE

R S

UP

PL

Y

50

W P

OW

ER

AM

P 5

0W

TX

FIL

TE

R

+B

AT

TE

RY

-B

AT

TE

RY

PW

R F

AIL-

CO

M

PW

R F

AIL

NO

PW

R F

AIL

NC

+9

2V

+3

0V

GN

D

TB

1-1

TB

1-2

TB

1-3

TB

1-4

TB

1-5

+9

2V

+3

0V

GN

D

SIG

NA

L IN

SIG

NA

L O

UT

GN

D

FA

IL O

UT

50

W T

X F

ILT

ER

PO

WE

R S

UP

PL

Y 5

0W

PO

WE

R A

MP

+B

AT

TE

RY

-B

AT

TE

RY

PW

R F

AIL-

CO

M

PW

R F

AIL

NO

PW

R F

AIL

NC

+9

2V

+3

0V

GN

D

TB

1-1

TB

1-2

TB

1-3

TB

1-4

TB

1-5

+9

2V

+3

0V

GN

D

SIG

NA

L IN

GN

D

FA

IL O

UT

SIG

NA

L O

UT

AD

DIT

ION

AL

3U

CH

AS

SIS

FO

R 1

00

W S

YS

TE

MS

AL

AR

M

RE

LA

Y

AL

AR

M R

EL

AY

_1

EX

T A

MP

FA

IL CO

M

EX

T A

MP

FA

IL-NC

EX

T A

MP

FA

IL-NO

INT

AM

P F

AIL C

OM

INT

AM

P F

AIL-N

C

INT

AM

P F

AIL-N

O

FA

IL

GN

D

FA

IL

GN

D

BA

LA

NC

E B

OA

RD

INP

UT

PO

RT

1

SIG

NA

L OU

T

INP

UT

PO

RT

2

INP

UT

SIG

NA

L OU

T

BA

LAN

CE

TR

AN

SF

OR

ME

R

INP

UT

SIG

NA

L OU

T

RX

CO

NN

EC

TIO

N B

OA

RD

or R

X F

ILT

ER

DU

MM

Y LO

AD

& A

TT

EN

UA

TO

R

INP

UT

T

X O

UT

RX

OU

T

LIN

E B

OA

RD

IMP

ED

AN

CE

MA

TC

HIN

G

SU

RG

E P

RO

TE

CT

ION

AD

JU

ST

AB

LE

AT

TE

NU

AT

OR

INP

UT

SIG

NA

L OU

T

INP

UT

SIG

NA

L OU

T

SIG

NA

L OU

T IN

PU

T

IMP

ED

AN

CE

MA

TC

HIN

G_1

SIG

NA

L OU

T IN

PU

T

BA

LA

NC

E C

OM

PO

NE

NT

S H

YB

RID

TX

INP

UT

BA

LA

NC

E P

OR

T

SIG

NA

L O

UT

RX

OU

TP

UT

2 W

ire

4 W

ire

4 W

ire

2 W

ire LO

OP

BA

CK

4 W

ire

INP

UT

TX

J1

PO

WE

R S

UP

PL

Y 5

0W

PO

WE

R A

MP

50

W T

X F

ILT

ER

RX

J8

INP

UT

S

IGN

AL O

UT

Figure 5-28. 9508 RF Chassis Block Diagram

Page 193: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-53

5.6.1 50 Watt Power Amplifier

The Power Amplifier is mounted on the front cover of the 9508 RF Chassis. The function of

the Power Amplifier is to amplify the RF outputs of the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system PLC

before these signals are passed to the line coupling equipment. The Power Amplifier develops

an RF output of 50 Watts. A green LED is located on the left side of the Power Amplifier front

panel as shown in the figure below. The LED is ON when the power amplifier is transmitting.

Green LED

Figure 5-29. 9508 RF Chassis Power Amplifier

In those applications that require 100 Watts of RF output, two 50 Watt Power Amplifiers are

used. The second 50 Watt Power Amplifier is mounted in a 3U chassis directly above the

HPS/RFL 9508 chassis as shown in FIGURE 5-30.

CAUTION

There must be a 1U minimum space between these chassis for convection cooling.

This additional 3U chassis will contain a total of five modules as follows:

1) Power Amplifier

2) Power Amplifier Power Supply

3) Mother Board

4) TX Filter

5) External Amp Connector Board as shown below.

Page 194: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-54

EXTERNAL AMP

CONNECTOR BOARD

TX

FILTER

POWER AMP

POWER SUPPLY MOTHERBOARD

50W POWER AMP (Mounted on

Front Door, not shown for clarity)

Figure 5-30. Additional 50W Module in 100W Systems

5.6.1.1 Setting Jumpers and Switches on the 50W Power Amplifier Circuit Board

Location of 50W

Power Amp Module

Figure 5-31. Location of 50W Power Amplifier Module

The 50W Power Amplifier has a circuit board which contains two programmable jumpers, J6

and J7. In addition to this, the board has five connectors (J1, J2, J3, J4, J5), and five

potentiometers (R8, R14, R69, R74, R83) that must be set for proper system operation. These

components can be seen below. Table 5-6 describes the functions of these components and

indicates how the jumpers and potentiometers must be set.

Two DIP Switch banks SW1 and SW2 have been added to the Power Amp Circuit Board.

These switches are factory set for optimum operation but can be changed in the field if

required. See TABLE 5-21 for a description of the switch functions and their settings.

Page 195: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-55

Figure 5-32. 50W Power Amp Circuit Board

Two DIP Switch banks SW1 and SW2 have been added to the Power Amp Circuit Board.

These switches are factory set for optimum operation but can be changed in the field if

required. The DIP switches shown above are factory set to protect the circuit board from

overvoltage or excessive phase angle situations. See TABLE 5-22 for a description of the

switch settings.

If the protective circuits are activated the Power Amplifier will shut down for approximately

2.5 seconds and then come up for 25ms. This pattern will continue until the safety parameters

are met and the condition cleared.

Table 5-21 Function of the Jumpers, Connectors and Potentiometers on the Power Amp Circuit Board

Reference Designation

Component Function

DS1

LED (green) This LED is located on the front left panel of the Power Amplifier. The LED is lit when the Power Amplifier is transmitting.

J1 connector Provides input dc voltage from power supply, +92Vdc and +30Vdc.

J2 connector Power output to TX Filter Module.

J3 connector Power amplifier failure alarm output signal. Signal goes to alarm relay on balance board, which provides form-C contacts on back of RF chassis. Output is +12Vdc when power amp fails.

J4 connector TX In (RF input signal from back of MA-650)

J5 connector Spare TX In (not used)

J6 & J7 jumpers These are Phase Jumpers used in 100W applications, which set the outputs of the two 50W amplifiers 180 deg out of phase. This will insure that the total output power is additive. In 50W applications, J6 and J7 can be set either way. In 100W applications, one 50W amp must be set to “A” and the other 50W amp must be set to “B”. As a

Page 196: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-56

standard, set the Main 50W amplifier to “A” and the Auxiliary 50W amplifier to “B” as shown below.

J6 J6J7 J7

Setting "A" Setting "B"

J8* jumpers For factory use only. Should always be set to position B.

J9*

jumpers For factory use only. Determines if output disconnect relay is used. For use with ON/OFF carrier set to B. For all other applications set to A.

J10* jumpers For factory use only. Should always be set to Insert.

R8 potentiometer Sets the low input RF signal threshold at J4

R14 potentiometer Sets the idle current, which is the power that the power amp draws from the power supply with no load and no input signal.

R69 potentiometer Balances the RF output signal.

R74 potentiometer Over current RF output adjustment.

R83 potentiometer RF output power level adjustment.

R163* potentiometer For factory use only.

Note:

All jumper and potentiometer settings are made at the factory and should not need field

adjustment, except the gain potentiometer R83, and the threshold potentiometer R8.

For DIP Switch settings SW1 and SW2 see the following table. Set to ON to enable the DIP

Switch.

Table 5-22 Function of the DIP Switches SW1 and SW2 on the Power Amp Board

SW1

Phase Limit Setting: The 50W Power Amplifier will shut down if a preset Phase Angle is exceeded. The factory set threshold is 60 degrees. SW1-1 through SW1-8 can be set as follows: Note that SW1-2, SW1-4, SW1-5 and SW1-6 are not used.

DIP Switch Phase Angle in Degrees

SW1-1 30

SW1-3 45

SW1-7 60 Default setting

SW1-8 90

SW2-1 thru SW2-4

Phase Detector Set Point: These DIP switches set the voltage threshold for the Phase Limit Setting. The Phase limit circuit will not operate if the voltage falls below the preset. SW2-1 through SW2-4 can be set as follows:

DIP Switch Setting

Page 197: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-57

SW2-1 Not used

SW2-2 40V

SW2-3 30-35V Default

SW2-4 20-25V

SW2-5 thru SW2-8

Overvoltage Detector Set Point: The 50W Power Amplifier will shut down if the output voltage exceeds the preset threshold. SW2-5 through SW2-8 can be set as follows:

DIP Switch Settings

SW2-5 90V

SW2-6 85V

SW2-7 70V Default

SW2-8 60V

Note:

The Phase Detector circuit will also shut down the Power Amplifier if the output voltage is

above the set threshold and the output current is very low (well below 200ma).

5.6.2 Power Amplifier Power Supply

V+

V-

C

NO

NC

Figure 5-33. Power Amplifier, Power Supply

The Power Amplifier, Power Supply supplies power to the HPS/RFL 9508 Power Amplifier.

There are two different types Power Supply available as shown below.

Table 5-23 Power Amp, Power Supplies

Assembly Number Input Voltage Range

107250-4 38Vdc to 150Vdc

107250-5 200Vdc to 300Vdc

Page 198: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-58

The 9508 Power Amplifier, Power Supply is a dual output, dc to dc converter. It is a switching

power supply using pulse width modulation. The 107254-4 operates from 38 Vdc to 150 Vdc,

and the 107254-5 operates from 200 Vdc to 300 Vdc. Each supply has two outputs, +30 Vdc @

0.25 Amps and +92 Vdc @ 2.4 Amps. Both outputs are connected to a common ground. A

block diagram of the Power Supply is shown in below

INPUT TRANSIENT

PROTECTION

INRUSH CURRENT LIMITING

DRIVE

CIRCUITRY

SWITCHING TRANS-

FORMER

OUTPUT FILTERING

+92 Vdc +30 Vdc

STATION BATTERY

INPUT

OPTICAL ISOLATOR

PULSE WIDTH

MODULATOR

Figure 5-34. Power Amplifier, Power Supply, Block Diagram

5.6.3 TX Filter

The HPS/RFL 9508 TX Filter is a plug-in module consisting of two PC boards and two air core

inductors. It plugs into the left side of the RF chassis.

CONNECTOR(Plugs Into Mother Board)

PC BOARD 107828-2

PC BOARD 107828-1

AIR CORE INDUCTOR

L2

AIR CORE INDUCTOR

L1

Figure 5-35. TX Filter, Top View

Page 199: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-59

The function of the TX Filter is to filter out harmonics and noise that is out of the bandwidth of

the filter. The bandwidth of the filter can be set to either 8kHz or 16kHz using two

programmable jumpers, J1 and J45. The filter center frequency is tunable from 24kHz to

496kHz using programmable jumpers. The outer edges are 20kHz and 500kHz. The 8kHz

bandwidth is used for most applications.

5.6.3.1 Setting Jumpers on the TX Filter

The TX Filter consists of two PC boards that are mounted at right angles to each other and are

supported by an aluminum frame. The TX Filter has a total of 44 jumpers that must be

configured for proper system operation. Two of these jumpers (J1 and J45) are used to select

the bandwidth of the filter which can be either 8kHz or 16kHz. Jumper J44 is used for system

testing, and the other 41 jumpers are used to tune the center frequency of the filter from 24kHz

to 496kHz. The outer edges are 20kHz and 500kHz. Tuning the filter is done from the 9508

TX Filter Programming Sheet supplied by HPS/RFL on the Customer CD. 27 of the jumpers

are located on the 107828-2 board. This is the board with the two large air core inductors

shown on the next page with the location of the jumpers. The remaining 17 Jumpers are located

on the 107828-1 board. The location of these jumpers is shown in FIGURE 5-36. Refer to

TABLE 5-24 for information on how to configure the jumpers on the TX Filter.

Page 200: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-60

J24

J26

J20

J19

J18

J23

J27

J25 J22

J21

J31

J33

J30

J34

J35

J32

J38

J39

J40

J41

J42

J43

J36

J37

J29 J28J45

8kHz

16kHz

Connector, plugs

into Mother Board

PC Board

(107828-2)PC Board

(107828-1)

Air Core

Inductor L2

Air Core

Inductor L1

Figure 5-36. Location of Jumpers on the TX Filter, PC Board 107828-2

Page 201: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-61

Table 5-24 TX Filter Setup Jumpers

Jumper Function

J1 and J45

Used to select 8kHz or 16kHz Tx Filter bandwidth. Both jumpers must be set to 8kHz to select 8kHz bandwidth. Both jumpers must be set to 16kHz to select 16kHz bandwidth.

J44

Used to select Normal or Test operation. Set to Normal position for normal system operation. Set to Test position to move the T1 Test Point from one coil to another during system testing. Used for tuning the air core inductors L1 and l2.

J1 to J13, and J15 to J43

Used to tune the center frequency of the Tx Filter from 24kHz to 496kHz. The outer edges are 20kHz and 500kHz. Tuning the filter is done from the 9508 Filter Calculation Macro. For example, for a center frequency of 90kHz, the following jumpers should be installed: J3, 5, 6, 8, 10, 11, 18, 20, 23, 24, 34, 35, 37 and 38

5.6.3.2 Transmit Tuning Procedure

1. Use the 9508 TX Filter Programming Sheet (9508 TX Filter Programming Sheet.xls) to

determine jumper settings.

2. Set jumpers as shown.

3. Connect a frequency selective voltmeter to TP1 and TP2 of the Line Board.

4. Apply a sine wave at the center frequency, at a low amplitude (>10VRMS) to the filter

input.

5. Set Jumper J44 in the “Norm” position.

6. Make sure the FSVM has a termination of 50 Ohms or use an external termination in parallel

across TP1-TP2.

7. Make sure the inductor locking screws (on inductor, inside shield) are not fully tightened.

8. Adjust L1 for a minimum level on the meter. If a null is not seen, the lowest value of the

first series capacitance may have to be varied.

9. Set Jumper J44 to the “Test” position.

10. Adjust L2 for a minimum level on the meter. If a null is not seen, the lowest value of the

second series capacitance may have to be varied.

11. Set Jumper J44 back to the “Norm” position.

Page 202: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-62

NO

RM

AL

TE

ST

16kH

z

8kH

z

J1J44

J17

J16

J15

J12

J13

J11

J7

J6

J5

J10

J4

J3

J2

J9

J8

Figure 5-37. Location of Jumpers on the TX Filter, PC Board 107828-1

Page 203: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-63

5.6.4 Balance Board and External Amp Connection Board

The Balance Board plugs into the RF chassis to the right of the TX Filter and is shown below.

HEAT SINK

R3 R4

T1

K1

K2

3 2 1 3 2 1

J2 J3

1

2 J4

3

Figure 5-38. Balance Board

The function of the Balance Board is to provide the capability of connecting two 50W

Amplifiers together for 100W applications. In the event of one of the 50W Amps failing, it

sinks half of the power output of the remaining Power Amp. The jumpers are used to select

50W or 100W operation.

The HPS/RFL 9508 External Amp Connection Board is a plug-in module consisting of a PC

board with wire jumpers only and uses the same PC board as the Attenuator Board. It is used in

place of the Balance Board in the external RF Chassis for 100W applications as shown in

FIGURE 5-39.

Page 204: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-64

5.6.4.1 Balance Board Jumper Settings

The Balance Board has three jumpers J2, J3 and J4 that must be set for proper system operation.

The jumper settings select either 50W or 100W operation, and must be set in accordance with

the table below. The jumper locations are shown below and are accessible only when the

Balance Board is removed from the chassis.

T

1

K1

K2

HEAT SINK

R3 R4

J2 J3

J4

123 3 2 1

1

2

3

Figure 5-39. Location of Jumpers on the Balance Board

Table 5-25 Setting Jumpers on the Balance Board

Number of Amplifiers

J2 Jumper Settings

J3 Jumper Settings

J4 Jumper Settings

One (50W) 1-2 2-3 2-3

Two (100W) 2-3 1-2 1-2

Page 205: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-65

5.6.5 Line Board

The HPS/RFL 9508 Line Board serves as the connection point between the HPS/RFL 9508 RF

Chassis and the Line Coupling equipment. Because it contains no active components, the Line

Board does not require any dc input voltage.

1

00

P

20

0P

30

0P

41

0P

.001UF

.002UF

12

.1 1

/2W

12

2

.5W

12

2

.5W

50

2

.5W

50

5

W

.00

3U

F

.00

41

UF

.01

UF

56UH

9.5A

100UH

9.5A

180UH

9.5A

12

.1 1

/2W

12

.1 1

/2W

8-18UH 10UH

9.5A

18UH

9.5A

33UH

9.5A

55869

55869

55689

55688

FU

SE

2A

25

0V

FU

SE

HO

LD

ER

32

88

2

FUSEHOLDER

32882

FUSE 2A 250V 121

47

.5

47

33

A

47

33

A

43

.2

AR

RE

ST

OR

92

62

7

99

13

4

18

0U

H

92

62

7

AR

RE

ST

OR

PA

RT

NU

MB

ER

SE

RIA

L N

UM

BE

R

13

0/1

50

130/150

G

TP8

Figure 5-40. Line Board

5.6.5.1 Theory of Operation

The RF Line board connects the HPS/RFL 9508 to the line coupling equipment. It contains two

hybrid transformers, a receive attenuator, a complex balance network, two impedance matching

transformers, and two surge arrestors. A block diagram of the Line Board appears below. Transmit Input 1

From Power Amp 1

RF From/ToLine Coupling

Equipment

Hybrid

Transformers

Impedance Matching

Transformers

Receive Attenuator

Surge

Arrestors

IN J11

OUT

Receive

Output to

RX Filter

Transmit Input 2 From Power Amp 2

(when used)

Complex

Balance

Network

Figure 5-41. RFL9508 Line Board, Block Diagram

Page 206: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-66

5.6.5.1.1 Hybrid Transformers

The HPS/RFL 9508 Line Board contains two hybrid transformers, T3 and T4. The primary

winding of T3 accepts the transmit input signal, and the primary winding of T4 develops the

receive output signal that is passed to the RX Filter.

Both hybrid transformers have two secondary windings, and are interconnected so that one

secondary of T3 is in series with a secondary of T4. One set of secondaries is connected across

the complex balance network, and the other set of secondaries is connected to the line coupling

equipment through line matching transformer T2. Fuses F1 and F2 provide overcurrent

protection, and surge arrestors E1 and E2, protect the equipment against an overvoltage

condition. For four wire applications, the signal going to the line coupling equipment can be

monitored at TP2, and the signal coming from the line coupling equipment can be monitored at

TP3. For two wire applications the signal going to or coming from the line coupling equipment

can be monitored at TP2.

5.6.5.1.2 Receive Attenuator

Resistors R9, R11, R12 and dual-section Receive Level potentiometer R10 are connected across

the primary of T4 to form an attenuator. The amount of signal sent to the RX Filter is

controlled by the setting of R10. Zener diodes CR1 and CR2 clamp the signal to a safe level.

The signal being sent to the RX Filter can be monitored at test points TP6 and TP7.

5.6.5.1.3 Complex Balance Network

Inductors L1 through L8, capacitors C1 through C9, Coarse Switch S1, fine potentiometer R1

and resistors R2 through R8 form an internal reactive balance network. This network is

connected across one set of secondaries of the hybrid transformers. Jumper J13 can be used to

enable or disable the internal balance network. The balance network is adjusted to match the

line impedance. To adjust the network, a frequency selective voltmeter (FSVM) is connected

across test points TP6 and TP7 on the Line Board, and S1 and R1 are adjusted to the lowest

possible transmitter signal level. S1 provides a rough adjustment of the resistance across the

hybrid secondaries by determining how many resistors in the network are connected in series.

R1 provides a fine resistance adjustment that allows the resistive balance to be precisely set.

Inductors L1 through L8 and capacitors C1 through C9 form the reactive portion of the balance

network. All components in the reactive portion can be jumpered in or out to balance out local

line reactance. L1 through L8 can be enabled or disabled by jumpers J13 through J19. Jumper

J1 controls C1, J2 controls C2, and so on. If no reactive balancing is required, J1 through J9,

and J14 through J19 must be placed in the out position.

5.6.5.1.4 Dummy Load

An internal Dummy Load and Attenuator Board are provided as described in Section 5.6.8. A

dummy load is a non-inductive load, typically 50ohms used when testing a PLC transmitter.

Use test points TP1 and TP2 to observe the signal going to the line coupling equipment.

5.6.5.1.5 Impedance Matching Transformers

Impedance matching transformers T1 and T2 match the impedance of the Line Board to that of

the line. Jumper J10 selects one of T1’s four impedance settings: 50, 75, 100, or 130 ohms.

Fuse F1 provides current protection, and surge arrestor E2 protects the equipment against an

overvoltage condition. Jumper J20 selects one of T2’s four impedance settings: 50, 75, 100, or

Page 207: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-67

130 ohms. Fuse F2 provides current protection, and surge arrestor E1 protects the equipment

against an overvoltage condition. In 2 wire applications, the signal going to or coming from the

line coupling equipment can be monitored at test point TP2. In 4 wire applications, the signal

going to the line coupling equipment can be monitored at test point TP2, and the signal coming

from the line coupling equipment can be monitored at test point TP3.

5.6.5.2 Setting Jumpers and Controls on the Line Board

The Line Board has 25 jumpers that must be set for proper system operation. Two of these

jumpers, J10 and J20, are for impedance matching, 12 jumpers are used for balancing the line

impedance, and 4 jumpers are used to select 2W or 4W operation. The location of these

jumpers is shown below. Refer to TABLE 5-26 for information on how to configure these

jumpers on the Line Board.

S1 R1

10

0P

20

0P

30

0P

41

0P .001UF

.002UF

12

.1 1/2

W

12

2.5

W

12

2.5

W

50

2.5

W

50

5

W

.00

3U

F

.00

41

UF

.01

UF

56UH9.5A

100UH9.5A

180UH9.5A

12

.1 1

/2W

12

.1 1

/2W

8-18UH 10UH9.5A

18UH9.5A

33UH9.5A

55869

55869

55689

55688FU

SE

2A

25

0V

FU

SE

HO

LD

ER

32

88

2

FUSEHOLDER32882

FUSE 2A 250V 121

47.5

47

33A

47

33A

43.2

AR

RE

ST

OR

92

62

7

99

13

4

18

0U

H

92

62

7A

RR

ES

TO

R

PA

RT

NU

MB

ER

SE

RIA

L N

UM

BE

R

13

0/1

50

130/150

G

TP8

J1 J2 J3 J4 J5 J6 J7 J8

J9

J10

J11J12

J16 J25

J20J28J13

J23

J19J14 J21 J15 J22 J17J18

R1S1R10

TP3

TP1

TP2

Figure 5-42. Location of Jumpers on the Line board

Table 5-26 Line Board, Setup Jumpers and Switch Settings

Reference Designation

Component Function

J10

Jumper Used to set Rx Impedance of 4W systems. Can be set to 50, 75, 100 or 130 Ohms.

J20

Jumper Used to set TX Impedance of 4W systems or the TX & RX Impedance of 2W systems. Can be set to 50, 75, 100 or 130 Ohms.

J1-J9

Jumper Adjusts capacitive component of line impedance. Refer to the Hybrid Tuning procedure. (5.5.3.5)

J13-J15, J17-19, J21 and J22

Jumper Adjusts inductive component of line impedance Refer to the Hybrid Tuning procedure. (5.5.3.5)

R1 Potentiometer Adjusts resistive component of line impedance. Refer to the Hybrid Tuning procedure. (5.5.3.5)

S1

Switch A 6-position rotary switch, which allows the selection of various resistors to adjust the resistive component of the line impedance. Refer to the Hybrid Tuning procedure. ( 5.5.3.5)

J28

Jumper Install this jumper in the TOP position if the attenuator module is not equipped. Install it in the BOTTOM position if the attenuator module is equipped.

Continued……

Page 208: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-68

Reference Designation

Component Function

J25 Jumper Selects 4W mode or Loopback mode.

J11, J12 and J23

Jumper All three of these jumpers must be set to 2W to select 2W mode. All three of these jumpers must be set to 4W to select 4W mode.

R10 Potentiometer Adjusts the RX Output level.

TP1 Test point Connect the low or common side of test equipment to this test point when monitoring TP2 or TP3.

TP2 Test point TX monitor high, test point.

TP3 Test point RX monitor high, test point.

J16

Jumper Used for factory testing. In normal operation this jumper is not installed.

5.6.6 RX Filter

The function of the Rx Filter is to prevent harmonics and noise from coming into the 8790 Pro

from the power line that is out of the bandwidth of the filter. The bandwidth of the Rx Filter

can be set to either 8kHz or 16kHz using two programmable jumpers on the board. The filter

center frequency is tunable from 24kHz to 496kHz using programmable jumpers. The outer

edges are 20kHz and 500kHz. The 8kHz bandwidth is used for most applications. The Rx

Filter Board is optional and is typically replaced with the Rx Connection Board.

(107821)

COIL

COIL

(107821)

COIL

(107821)

D

Figure 5-43. Location of Jumpers on the RX Filter board

5.6.6.1 Setting Jumpers on the RX Filter and RX Filter Tuning

The RX Filter has a large number of jumpers (about 100) that must be configured for proper

system operation. These jumpers allow a user to select the bandwidth, which can be either

8kHz or 16kHz, and to tune the center frequency, which can be from 24kHz to 496kHz (the

outer edges are 20kHz and 500kHz). The location of these jumpers is shown in FIGURE 5-44.

Tuning the filter is done per the Microsoft Excel® Worksheet “9508 RX Filter Programming

Sheet.xls” supplied with the Customer CD.

Page 209: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-69

(107821)

COIL

COIL

(107821)

COIL

(107821)

D

"JB"

Group

"JA" Group

"JC" Group

"JD"

Group

"JE" Group

L1

L2 L3"JL2" Group

"JL1" Group

"JL3" Group

J2

J3

Figure 5-44. Location of Jumpers on the RX Filter board, Showing Jumper Groupings

In addition to the jumpers, the RX filter has three tunable inductors, L1, L2 and L3. Their

functions are as follows:

L2 controls the balance of the filter (flat response at both sides of center frequency).

L1 controls the attenuation at the upper side of center frequency.

L3 controls the attenuation at the lower side of center frequency.

5.6.7 RX Connection Board

The RX Connection Board is used in place of the RX Filter in applications that do not require

an RX Filter.

Page 210: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-70

5.6.8 Attenuator Board

The function of the attenuator board is to provide 40dB of attenuation during loopback testing.

Toggle switch SW1 is used to select either Normal or Loopback operation. Test points TP1 and

TP2 allow the user to monitor the output of the attenuator.

SW1R

1 R2

R3

R4

R5

R9

R1

0 R1

1

R7

R6

R8TP2

TP1

2003 RFL ELECTRONICS INC, NJ, USA

9508 ATTENUATOR BD,ECB NO 107813 REV-A

SW1

Figure 5-45. 9508 Attenuator Board

5.6.8.1 Attenuator Board Settings

The Attenuator Board has one toggle switch (SW1) that must be set for proper system

operation. The toggle switch SW1 selects either Normal or Loopback operation. In Normal

operation, set the switch to the UP position. In Loopback operation set to switch to the DOWN

position. The switch location is shown below, and is accessible when the Attenuator Board is

plugged into the chassis.

Page 211: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-71

5.6.9 Motherboard

The HPS/RFL 9508 Motherboard is mounted on the rear right side of the 9508 chassis as

viewed from the front. It provides interconnections for the five RF modules that plug into it

from the front of the chassis. The illustration below shows the rear view of the motherboard.

Connectors J6 and J7 are TNC connectors which provide connections to the line coupling

equipment. J4, J5, J8 and J9 are BNC connectors, J10 is a two pin plug-in connector, and TB1

is an eight position terminal block.

RX OUT

4W RX

4W TX

OR 2W I/O

EXT AMP

FAIL IN

EXT AMP IN TX IN

EXT AMP

OUTEXT

AMP

FAIL

INT

AMP

FAIL

C

C

NC

NC

NO

NO

Dotted lines indicate boards that plug into the Motherboard from the front of the

9508 chassis

Attenuator

BoardRX Filter Line Board TX Filter

Balance

Board

J8

J6

J7

J10 TB1

J5

J1

J3

Figure 5-46. 9508 Mother Board, Rear View

Table 5-27 Motherboard Rear Panel Connector Assignments

Board Label Reference Designation

Connector type Application

TX IN J1 BNC Tx In from the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system PLC

EXT AMP IN J5 BNC Input signal from external amp

EXT AMP OUT J3 BNC Output signal to external amp

4W RX J6 TNC 4W Input from line coupling equipment

4WTX OR 2WI/O

J7 TNC 4W Output to line coupling equipment or 2W Input/Output

RX OUT J8 BNC Rx Out to the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system PLC

EXT AMP FAIL IN

J10 Two-pin plug-in type

External Amp Fail input

INT AMP FAIL EXT AMP FAIL

TB1 8-position terminal block

Power Amplifier Fail, Relay Contacts (See the following table for terminal assignments)

Page 212: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-72

Table 5-28 Motherboard, TB1 Terminal Assignments

Terminal Numbers Terminal Assignments

TB1-1 Internal Amp Fail Relay COM

TB1-2 Internal Amp Fail Relay NO

TB1-3 Internal Amp Fail Relay NC

TB1-4 External Amp Fail Relay COM

TB1-5 External Amp Fail Relay NO

TB1-6 External Amp Fail Relay NC

TB1-7 Chassis Ground

TB1-8 Earth Ground*

*Note

At TB1-8 on the Mother Board Rear Panel a ground wire should be connected. Ideally this

wire should go directly to the sub-station ground bar, if this is not feasible, shorting the wire to

TB1-7 (Chassis ground) is an alternate method. This will cause surge currents to pass through

the Mother Board and chassis before exiting to ground. Connecting directly to the sub-station

ground bar is preferred.

5.6.10 Quick Tuning Procedure and Jumper Setting Overview

1. For the selected center frequency, set the jumpers as described in the Microsoft Excel®

Worksheet “9508 Rx Filter Programming Sheet.xls.”

2. Connect a signal generator (HP3336B or HP3325A or equivalent) to J2 of the Rx Filter.

Connect a selective level meter (Wandel & Golterman SPM-32A or 33A, Rycom

6021A, Signalcrafters 110, or equivalent) with a terminating impedance of 50 Ohms, to

J3 of the RX Filter. Use J4 as the ground connection.

3. Set the center frequency of the test equipment (signal generator and selective level

meter) according to the selection made in Step 1.

4 Adjust inductors L1, L2 and L3 to have a minimum loss (highest voltage level) at the

selected center frequency.

For 8kHz bandwidth Rx Filters, perform steps 5, 6 and 7.

For 16kHz bandwidth Rx Filters perform steps 8, 9 and 10.

5. Check the attenuation at the selected center frequency +/- 4kHz <0.35 dBm.

Adjust L2 to have a balanced response (the same level at +4 and –4 kHz) dBm.

6. Check the attenuation at the selected center frequency +/- 12kHz.

Adjust L1 to get the desired attenuation at +12 kHz >9.5 dBm.

Adjust L3 to get the desired attenuation at +12 kHz >9.5 dBm.

Page 213: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-73

7. Check the ripple between +/-3.5 kHz from the center frequency to be < 0.3 dBm.

8 Check the attenuation at the selected center frequency +/- 8kHz <0.35 dBm.

Adjust L2 to have a balanced response (the same level at +8 and –8 kHz) dBm.

9. Check the attenuation at the selected center frequency +/- 18kHz <0.35 dBm.

Adjust L1 to get the desired attenuation at +18 kHz >9.5 dBm.

Adjust L3 to get the desired attenuation at +18 kHz >9.5 dBm.

10. Check the ripple between +/-8 kHz from the center frequency to be < 0.35 dBm.

4 – Wire Systems Four-Wire systems require the following jumpers to be set to 4W position on the Line board:

J11, J12, J23, and J25. Refer to paragraph 5.6.5.2 and FIGURE 5-42 for the location of these

jumpers.

2 – Wire Systems Two-Wire systems require the following jumpers to be set to 2W position on the Line board:

J11, J12, and J23. Refer to paragraph 5.6.5.2 and FIGURE 5-42 for the location of these

jumpers.

50W – Systems 50Watt systems require jumpers to be set on the Balance Board as follows:

J2 must be set to the 1-2 position.

J3 must be set to the 2-3 position.

J4 must be set to the 2-3 position.

Refer to paragraph 5.5.4.1 and FIGURE 5-39 for the location of these jumpers.

100W – Systems 100Watt systems require jumpers to be set on the Balance Board as follows:

J2 must be set to the 2-3 position.

J3 must be set to the 1-2 position.

J4 must be set to the 1-2 position.

Refer to paragraph 5.6.4.1 and FIGURE 5-39 for the location of these jumpers.

Changing the RX Frequency Band The RFL9508 is typically shipped from the factory preprogrammed for the desired RF

frequency band. In the event that the user wishes to change the operating band The following

steps must be taken.

1. Tune the TX filter to the proper band (section 5.6.3.2)

2. Tune the RX filter to the proper band (section 5.6.10)

3. Set the transceiver Transmit and Receive frequencies

4. Perform the commissioning procedure.

Page 214: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-74

5.6.11 Rear Panel Wiring for the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system PLC with 50W Applications

To/ From Line Coupling

Equipment

4WRX

2WI/O4WTX

RXOUTEXTAMP

ALARM

FAIL

EXTAMPIN

1

2

C

NC AM P

I NT

TXIN

6

5

3

4

TB1

7

8

NO

NC AM P

EXT

FAIL

NO

C

GNDEARTH

EXTAMP

OUT

!

1

2

3

4

5

USED

NO T

+15

VP

AO

UT

50

0800

22

24

23

21

20

19

15

18

17

16

14

13

12

811

10

9 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

SE

NS

IT IV

E

C A

U T

IO

N

S T

A T

IC

DNP

RS-2 32

6

5

2

3

4

1

1PPS

GPS

M ODBUSRS-48 5

ETHERNET

IRIG- B

SYSTEMI/O

500430

RX

IN

TX

/R

X2

W

PL

CA

NA

LO

G

5009

30-4

RX

TX

4W

-15

V

CL

I

GN

D

GN

D

(500805)

RS-4 49X.21V.35

(500810)

SW1

S1

S4

S E

NS

IT

IVE

CA

U T

ION

ST

AT

IC

POWERSUPPL Y1 & 2

+

-

M AJOR

SW 2

SWST ATIONBATT ERY

+

-

M IN OR

NO T

USED

WARNING !Do not

disconnect under

power

V+

V-

C

NO

NC

Switched Station Battery

for External Device

Disconnect+ -To Station Battery

Should be connected with a separate wire to the

Sub-Station Ground Bar

PLC Analog Module

RFL™ GARD

Pro™ System

50 W 9508

RF

Chassis

(BNC)(BNC)

(BNC)

(BNC) (BNC)

Figure 5-47. Rear Panel Wiring of a typical HPS/RFL GARD Pro system PLC with a 50W 9508 RF Chassis.

Page 215: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-75

5.6.12 Rear Panel Wiring for the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system PLC with 100W Applications

To/ From Line

Coupling

Equipment

4 W RX

2W I/O4W TX

RX OUT

(BNC)

EXT AMP

ALARM

F AIL

EXT AMP IN

1

2

C

NC AMP

INT

TX IN

(BNC)

6

5

3

4

TB1

7

8

NO

NC AM P

EXT

FAIL

NO

C

GNDEARTH

EXT AMP

OUT

(BNC) !

1

2

3

4

5

+15V

PA

OU

T

500

800

22

24

23

21

20

19

15

18

17

16

14

13

12

811

10

9 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

SE

NS

ITIV

E

CAU

TION

STA

TIC

DNP

RS-2 32

6

5

2

3

4

1

1PPS

GPS

M OD BUSRS-48 5

ETHERNET

IRIG- B

SYSTEM I/O

500430

RX

IN

TX/

RX

2W

PL

C AN

ALO

G

5009

30-

4

RX

TX

4W

-1

5V

CLI

GN

D

GN

D

(500805)

RS-4 49 X.21 V.35

(500810)

SW1

S1

S4

SENSITIVE

CAU

TION

STATIC

PO WER SUPPLY 1&2

+

-

MAJ OR

SW 2

SW ST ATION BATT ERY

+

-

MINO R

(BNC)

(BNC)

WARNING!Do not

disconnect under

power

V+

V-C

NO

NC

Switched Station Battery

for External Device

Disconnect+ -To Station Battery

Should be connected with a separate wire to the

Sub- Station Ground Bar

PLC Analog Module

RFL™

GARD Pro™

System

4W RX

2W I /O4W T X

RX OUT

( BNC)

EXT AM P

AL ARM

FAIL

EXT AMP IN

1

2

C

NC AMP

INT

T X IN

( BNC)

6

5

3

4

T B1

7

8

NO

NC AMP

EXT

F AIL

NO

C

GNDEART H

EXT AM P

OUT

(BNC) !

1

2

3

4

5

( BNC)

( BNC)

V+

V-

C

NO

NC

50 W RF

Chassis

Additional

50 W Chassis

for 100W

applications

Figure 5-48. Rear Panel Wiring of a typical HPS/RFL GARD Pro system PLC with a 100W 9508 RF Chassis.

Page 216: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-76

5.7 Optional Switched Battery Power Supply

I/O Module, Single On/Off Switch

This module was developed for use when a PLC (On/Off) module is installed in a HPS/RFL

GARD Pro system chassis. Input power is feed out to an auxiliary device through the Switched

Battery Terminals as shown below. No communication interface is possible with this Power

Supply I/O when a double pole switch is used.

This Power Supply I/O will connect internal power supplies to an external auxiliary device and

provide major and minor alarm contacts. The switch has a dual function when placed in the

OFF position:

a. Main power is disconnected.

b. Power is disconnected to an auxiliary device.

!

C

NC

NO

C

NC

NO

POWER SUPPLY 1&2 SWITCHED BATT

MAJOR MINOR

SW1

Power Inputs

Switched

Battery Output

to Auxiliary

Device

O

I

Figure 5-49. Optional Power Supply I/O Module, Single On/Off Switch

The “+” and “-”designations on the Power Supply I/O module rear panel terminals are totally

arbitrary and the AC or “+” and “-”DC external power sources can be connected to either

terminal. The major and minor alarm relays are contained on this interface and the connections

are brought out to the lower three terminals of each terminal block as shown in the figure

above. Both relays are energized under normal operating conditions and are de-energized for

Page 217: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-77

an alarm or alert condition. This ensures that the chassis will cause an alarm condition when

power is lost.

TB1-1 (+)

TB1-2 (-)

Major

Alarm

TB2-1 (+)

TB2-2 (-)

Minor

Alarm

SW1

(DP/ST)

P.S. 1

P.S. 1

P.S. 2

P.S. 2

(If Installed)

TB1-3

TB1-4

TB1-5

TB2-3

TB2-4

TB2-5

Figure 5-50. Switched Battery Output, Functional Diagram

Page 218: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-78

5.8 Installations with Two or More PLC Modules

As shown below a second power supply has been factory installed below the original power

supply in a 6U chassis, set-up instructions for the second PLC module follow. Always refer to

the application drawings supplied with your HPS/RFL GARD Pro system unit for specific

wiring instructions unique to your installation.

S1 S2 S5S3 S4 S6 S7 S9 S11 S12 S13S10S8

POWER SUPPLY 1

MAJOR

RS-449 X.21 V.35

SW1

-

+

MINOR

SW2

POWER SUPPLY 2

-

+

POWER SUPPLY 1

SW1

-

+

SW2

POWER SUPPLY 2

-

+

+20

-20RX

AMP GAIN

500930

GND

GND

CLI

+15V

-15V

RX IN

TX

PA OUT

ADJTX FAIL

R19

PLC ANALOG

ADJR13 AMP

ADJIMPED

R8

SENSITIVE

CAUTION

STATIC

RX

AMP GAIN

500930

GND

GND

CLI

+15V

-15V

RX IN

TX

PA OUT

ADJTX FAIL

R19

PLC ANALOG

ADJR13 AMP

ADJIMPED

R8

SENSITIVE

CAUTION

STATIC

24

22

23

20

21

18

19

3

14

16

17

15

13

11

12

9

10

7

8

5

6

4

2

1

24

22

23

20

21

18

19

3

14

16

17

15

13

11

12

9

10

7

8

5

6

4

2

1

IRIG-B

1PPS

GPS

2

RS-485

DNPMOD BUS

6

3

5

4

1

SYSTEM I/O

ETHERNET

RS-232

500420

FINE

COARSE

FINE

COARSE

Additional Power

Supply I/O (500310-6)

External connections

to second PLC unit

First PLC unit set for

Internal Power Source

Second PLC unit set

for External Power

Source

TB1

COM

PS FAIL

These three terminals are connected to a

relay that is energized under normal

operating conditions. If the PLC power

supply fails, the relay will de-energize.

Figure 5-51. Making Connections to a Second PLC Module

If this is a field installation do the following:

1. Remove the securing screws.

2. Carefully slide out the second PLC analog module.

Note:

An Extender Module is available from RFL. This module will secure the PCB while

allowing complete access. Part No. 500940.

3. Verify or change Jumper J30 and J31 to the EXT position as shown on the following

figure.

Page 219: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-79

EXTINT

EXTINT

Setting Jumpers

for External Power

J30

J31

Second PLC

Analog Module

Figure 5-52. Setting Jumpers on Second PLC Analog Module

4. Re-install the second PLC analog module.

5. External connections to the second power supply are shown below.

Table 5-29 TB1 Connections on Second PLC Module

Second PLC Module (TB1 Designation) Power Supply 4 Terminal Number/Function

TB1-1 8 (+20V)

TB1-2 9 (-20V)

TB1-3 10 (Ground)

Page 220: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

5-80

Page 221: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

6-1

Troubleshooting Section 6.

6.1 Introduction

1. This section describes troubleshooting procedures that can be done by the user in the

field. Please contact HPS/RFL Service at 973.334.3100 or by e-mail at

[email protected] for further assistance.

Troubleshooting can be broken down into the following two types:

1. Setup Errors.

2. Equipment Problems.

The basic objective of any troubleshooting guide is to determine the type and location of a

problem. Once this is accomplished, taking one of the following actions will usually restore the

HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ system to operation.

1. For setup problems, verify and re-configure the unit or units that were not setup

correctly.

2. For equipment problems, contact HPS/RFL by phone at 973.334.3100 or by e-mail at

[email protected]

6.2 Connectivity Issues

Once a PC is physically connected to a GARD unit through the front Ethernet port and there is

no access to the device the following steps will assist in restoring access.

1. Ensure that the power light is illuminated on the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system.

2. Check the LAN settings on your computer.

a) Go to the command prompt and type “ipconfig”

b) Then visually confirm the IP information is correct.

c) See Section 4.1

3. Check the Ethernet cable with a connectivity tester to verify functionality.

4. Use the flow chart on the following page to further identify connectivity issues.

Page 222: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

6-2

6.2.1 Connectivity Issues Troubleshooting Flow Chart

The following flow chart will assist the user in identifying connectivity problems.

YES YESIs HTTP/HTTPS

Correct?

NO

Are link LEDs ON?

START

YES

Contact RFL or

your IT person

Verify that the cable connection is secure,

if necessary re-seat the cable

NO

Is PC configured for

DHCP?

FRONT

REAR

YES

Is your PC IP address 192. 168.1.X

NO

Is rear port IP address

correct?

Can you Ping the unit?

Which port are you trying to access?

YES

NORetry login with

correct address

NO

Disconnect cable for

10 seconds and

reinstall

Enable DHCP or

verify static IP address is in the

same subnet

YES

Is your PC address on the same subnet

as the rear port address?

YES

NO

Is units rear port

connection OK?NO

YESEstablish rear port

connection and retryPossible network issue ,

contact IT person

NO

Use the correct

address

Figure 6-1. Connectivity Flow Chart

Page 223: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

6-3

6.3 Module Level Alarms

Each module can report a Major or Minor alarm. This information is sent over the Control Bus

and is a status condition only. The time critical alarms should be handled by the logic

functions. Not all modules generate alarms.

The criteria for a module going into Major or Minor alarm is hard-wired into the module and

cannot be changed by the user. However, how the system reacts to these alarms is controlled

by the user. For each alarm type on each module, the user can select if he wants to put the

system into Major Alarm, Minor Alarm, or to ignore the module alarm.

The user programs the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system alarms using the Alarm Configurations

Webpage described in Section 4.11.2

6.3.1 PLC Troubleshooting

6.3.1.1 PLC Digital Module, Module Level Alarms

Table 6-1 PLC Digital Module, Module Level Alarms

Major Alarm Minor Alarm How is Alarm Generated

Loss of Transmitter

The transmitter has failed.

SNR The Signal to Noise Ratio is too low.

Logic Bus The logic bus disable bit is set.

Carrier Active if the Carrier is forced to any state.

Checkback The Checkback sequence has failed.

RX Level Active if the receive level is too low.

RPM Active if the Reflected Power Meter has failed.

Page 224: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

6-4

6.3.1.2 Common PLC Troubleshooting Issues

Table 6-2 PLC Common PLC Troubleshooting Issues

Problem Possible Cause Solution

TX Fail alarm active

Front and rear PLC modules not in same slot.

Confirm modules in same slot

Filter strapping wrong Confirm filter jumpers correct Perform TX commissioning procedure

Amp gain set too low Adjust TX fail R19 on power amp

TX fail threshold improperly set Adjust TX fail R19 on power amp

Failed PLC rear module Replace PLC rear module

Failed PLC front module Replace PLC front module

Low TX signals at PA out test points

Front and rear PLC modules not in same slot.

Confirm modules in same slot

Amp gain set too low Perform TX commissioning procedure

Failed PLC rear module Replace PLC rear module

Failed PLC front module Replace PLC front module

Low TX signal level at TX BNC connector

Front and rear PLC modules not in same slot.

Confirm modules in same slot

Filter strapping wrong Confirm filter jumpers correct Perform TX commissioning procedure

Amp gain set too low Perform TX commissioning procedure

Failed PLC rear module Replace PLC rear module

Failed PLC front module Replace PLC front module

RX alarm active

No input signal Confirm signal present at RX test points

RX level calibration not done Perform RX level calibration procedure (see 5.5.2.1)

Failed PLC rear module Replace PLC rear module

Failed PLC front module Replace PLC front module

RPM alarm active Line tuner not tuned Tune line tuner

Failed PLC rear module Replace PLC rear module

Page 225: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

6-5

6.3.1.3 The PLC Digital Board Components

The HPS/RFL GARD Pro system PLC digital PLC board has extensive jumper and switch

settings along with 26 test points. This includes the LEDs and test points on the front of the

board, which are the only test points and LEDs accessible when the front cover is opened.

CAUTION

The following information is to be used by qualified personnel only, normally an HPS/RFL

Service Engineer.

The illustration below shows the location of all switches, jumpers, LEDs and test points on the

board followed by a description of their use.

TP17 J3 TP22 TP23 TP20 TP21 TP19 TP10 J8 J10

J16

J7

J13

J12

J9

SW1

J11

TP12

TP9

TP16 TP13 TP1 TP2 TP11 J4 J5 J14 J15

TP14

TP8

TP15

TP7

TP6

TP4

TP18

TP25 TP26 TP27 TP3 TP24DS2 DS4 DS6 DS8

DS1 DS3 DS5 DS7

Top View

Front View

Figure 6-2. PLC Digital Board

Page 226: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

6-6

CAUTION

The following table lists test points designed for factory use only. These points are not ESD

protected. Users should not need to connect test equipment to these points in the field.

Table 6-3 Settings for the PLC Digital Board

Reference Designation

Description Function

DS1 LED Indicator Green = Enabled

Amber = Disabled – Module (Main Board)

Red = TX Disabled

DS2 LED Indicator Green = No Alarms

Red = Any Alarm(s)

DS3 LED Indicator Green = TX Shift Up

DS4 LED Indicator Green = RX Shift Up

DS5 LED Indicator Green = TX Center

DS6 LED Indicator Green = RX Center

DS7 LED Indicator Green = TX Shift Down

DS8 LED Indicator Green = RX Shift Down

J3 4-pin Header Debug Header: For factory use only.

J4 8-pin Header For factory use only.

J5 8-pin Header For factory use only.

J8 7-pin Header PIC Programming Header: For factory use only.

J9 26-pin Header Actel Programming Header: For factory use only.

J10 3-pin Header NORM: Must always be in NORM position

TEST: For factory use only.

J11 14-pin Header For factory use only.

J12 3-pin Header NORM: Must always be in NORM position

DEBUG: For factory use only.

J13 6-pin Header Flash Programming Header: For factory use only.

J14 3-pin Header DSP: For factory use only.

J15 3-pin Header MPU: For factory use only.

J16 3-pin Header NORM: Must always be in NORM position

PRGM: For factory use only.

SW1 Push Button Switch For factory use only.

TP1 Test Point For factory use only.

TP2 Test Point For factory use only.

TP3 Front Panel Test

Point

Line Out: In 4W Mode: TX output to line

In 2W Mode: TX/RX line connection

TP4 Test Point +15V: +15V Analog Supply

TP6 Test Point +5VA: +5V Analog supply

TP7 Test Point +2.5V: +2.5V Digital supply

TP8 Test Point GND: Ground

Continued….

Page 227: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

6-7

Reference Designation

Description Function

TP9 Test Point GND: Digital ground

TP10 Test Point GND: Digital ground

TP11 Test Point +3.3VA: 3.3V Analog supply

TP12 Test Point +1.6V: 1.6V DSP supply

TP13 Test Point -5VA: -5V Analog supply

TP14 Test Point +3.3V: +3.3V Digital supply

TP15 Test Point +5VD: +5V Digital supply

TP16 Test Point GNDA: Analog ground

TP17 Test Point GNDA: Analog ground

TP18 Test Point -15V: -15V Analog supply

TP19 Test Point For factory use only.

TP20 Test Point For factory use only.

TP21 Test Point For factory use only.

TP22 Test Point For factory use only.

TP23 Test Point For factory use only.

TP24 Front Panel Test

Point

GNDA: Analog ground

TP25 Front Panel Test

Point

ADC IN: Analog to digital converter input

TP26 Front Panel Test

Point

RX: Receive level after attenuation stage

TP27 Front Panel Test

Point

TX OUT: Input to power amp

6.3.1.4 The PLC Analog Module Components

The PLC Analog Module has extensive jumper and control settings along with test points.

CAUTION

The following information is to be used by qualified personnel only, normally an HPS/RFL

Service Engineer.

The illustrations below show the location of all switches, jumpers and test points on the module

followed by a description of their use.

Page 228: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

6-8

J3 J4 J35, 36 TP7 TP10 J30 J31 J34 J33 J32

TP9

F5

F6

J25

J22

J21

TP11

J24

J20

J19

J18

J17

J15

J16

J14J13J12J27J28J10C2R5J9R2J7J8TP4TP5TP8

J11

J5J6 J39*J38* J40*

L4

Figure 6-3. PLC Analog Module Top View

* Jumpers added on revised board

Page 229: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

6-9

CA

UT

ION

ST

AT

ICS

EN

SIT

IVER1

3 A

MP

IMP

ED

AD

J

R8

AM

P G

AIN

AD

J

R1

9T

X F

AIL

AD

J

PA

OU

T

RX

IN

FIN

E

CO

AR

SE

TX

/RX

2W

TX

4W

RX

GN

D

+1

5V

-15

VG

ND

CL

I

Connect dummy load

Common test point (black)

RX in test point

(yellow)

Power amp out test

point (red)

Common test point (black)

R13 Amp impedance adjust

R19 Amp TX fail adjust

R8 Amp gain adjust

R46

S1

Figure 6-4. PLC Analog Module Rear Panel View

TP3 TP1 TP6 TP2

Figure 6-5. PLC Power Amp Section

Page 230: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

6-10

Table 6-4 Settings for the PLC Analog Module

Reference Designation

Description Function

C2 Trimmer

capacitor

Used for reflected power meter calibration.

F5 Fuse TX protection fuse, 1A, 250V, slow-blow, HPS/RFL Part No. 103473

F6 Fuse RX protection fuse, 1A, 250V, slow-blow, HPS/RFL Part No. 103473

J3 18-pin Header Used to set TX Filter frequency. See Section 5.5.4

J4 12-pin Header Used to set TX Filter frequency. See Section 5.5.4

J5 12-pin Header Used to set TX Filter frequency. See Section 5.5.4

J6 12-pin Header Used to set TX Filter frequency. See Section 5.5.4

J7 18-pin Header Used to set TX Filter frequency. See Section 5.5.4

J8 12-pin Header Used to set TX Filter frequency. See Section 5.5.4

J9 12-pin Header Used to set TX Filter frequency. See Section 5.5.4

J10 12-pin Header Used to set TX Filter frequency. See Section 5.5.4

J11 18-pin Header Used to set TX Filter frequency. See Section 5.5.4

J12 2-pin Header Used to adjust capacitive component of balance network. See Section 6.3.5

J13 2-pin Header Used to adjust capacitive component of balance network. See Section 6.3.5

J14 2-pin Header Used to adjust capacitive component of balance network. See Section 6.3.5

J15 2-pin Header Used to adjust capacitive component of balance network. See Section 6.3.5

J16 2-pin Header Used to adjust inductive component of balance network. See Section 6.3.5

J17 2-pin Header Used to select or bypasses Inductor L4 which is fine adjustment for inductive

component of Balance Network. See Section 6.3.5

Install Jumper J17 to bypass L4.

Do Not Install J17 to select L4.

J18 2-pin Header Used to adjust inductive component of balance network. See Section 6.3.5

J19 2-pin Header Used to adjust inductive component of balance network. See Section 6.3.5

J20 2-pin Header Used to adjust inductive component of balance network. See Section 6.3.5

J21 3-pin Header Used to select 2-wire operation via Skewed Hybrid or 4-wire operation.

2W = 2-wire operation via Skewed Hybrid.

4W = 4-wire operation (Jumper not used on assembly 500930-20)

J22 3-pin Header Used to select 2-wire operation via Skewed Hybrid or 4-wire operation.

2W = 2-wire operation via Skewed Hybrid.

4W = 4-wire operation (Jumper not used on assembly 500930-20)

J23 TX connector BNC Connector

J24 3-pin Header ISOLATE (FSK) = FSK Operation or ON/OFF 4 –wire operation or ON/OFF 2-

wire operation via Skewed Hybrid.

CONNECT (ON/OFF) = On/Off 2-wire operation (shorts TX to RX, do not

install J27 or J28).

J25 3-pin Header Used to select 2-wire operation via Skewed Hybrid or 4-wire operation.

2W = 2-wire operation via Skewed Hybrid.

4W = 4-wire operation (Jumper not used on assembly 500930-20)

Continued….

Page 231: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

6-11

Reference Designation

Description Function

J26 Rx connector BNC Connector

J27 2-pin Header Selects 75 Ohm termination with J27 installed and J28 uninstalled.

Max power dissipation is 1 Watts. Do not install with J24 in

CONNECT(ON/OFF) position.

J28 2-pin Header Selects 50 Ohm termination with J28 installed and J27 uninstalled.

Max power dissipation is 2 Watt. Do not install with J24 in

CONNECT(ON/OFF) position.

J30 3-pin Header Selects internal or external power supply via TB1 pins 1, 2 and 3

on PLC Analog Module rear panel.

Set J30 and J31 to INT to select internal power supply.

Set J30 and J31 to EXT to select external power supply.

J31 3-pin Header

J32 2-pin Header Selects one of three modes of CLI (Carrier Level Indicator) output

driver. Connect external meter to TB1 pins 4 and 6 on PLC

Analog Module rear panel.

Selects 0-5V with J32 installed and J33 and J34 uninstalled.

Selects 0-100uA with J33 installed and J32 and J34 uninstalled.

Selects 0-1mA with J34 installed and J32 and J33 uninstalled.

J33 2-pin Header

J34 2-pin Header

J35 3-pin Header Selects Normal operation or Test operation.

Set J35 and J36 to NOR for Normal operation.

Set J35 and J36 to TEST for Test operation. J36 3-pin Header

J38 3-pin Header Used to set TX Filter frequency (new board only). See Section 6.4

J39 3-pin Header Used to set TX Filter frequency (new board only). See Section 6.4

J40 3-pin Header Used to set TX Filter frequency (new board only). See Section 6.4

L4 Inductor Used for fine adjustment of inductive component of balance

network. See Section 6.3.5

R2 Potentiometer Used for reflected power meter calibration.

R5 Potentiometer Used for reflected power meter calibration.

S1 6-position Rotary

Switch

Used for coarse adjustment of resistive component of balance

network. See Section 6.3.5 for hybrid tuning procedure.

R46 Potentiometer Used for fine adjustment of resistive component of balance

network. See Section 6.3.5 for hybrid tuning procedure.

TP1 Test Point Power Amp Input

TP2 Test Point Power Amp Output (U1 pin 1)

TP3 Test Point Power Amp Fail

TP4 Test Point Ground

TP5 Test Point Ground

TP6 Test Point Ground

TP7 Test Point Power Amp Output To TX Filter

TP8 Test Point Input to Tx Filter

TP9 Test Point Positive Power Supply Rail (For factory use only)

TP10 Test Point Negative Power Supply Rail (For factory use only)

TP11 Test Point In 4-wire operation, monitors TX output to the line.

In 2-wire operation, monitors Input to the Skewed Hybrid.

Page 232: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

6-12

This page intentionally

left blank

Page 233: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

7-1

Software Upgrade Utility Section 7.

7.1 System Firmware Upgrade Overview

The HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ system uses an upgrade tool to install a new system firmware.

RFL now provides the ability to have a backup image of the system firmware. The new

firmware will swap the configuration into a standby partition. This greatly lessens the

downtime when upgrading takes place. This also provides the ability to revert back to the

previous firmware.

Advanced Settings Select “Show Advance Settings” to select the following advanced options. Also select

“Advanced Settings” to choose a different IP address.

Advanced Setting Functionality

Upload – Upload new firmware as standby (selected by default)

Swap & Reboot – Make standby version active (selected by default)

Configuration

o Use Current – Use current configuration after swap and reboot (selected by default)

Note:

The Use Current option is only valid when uploading firmware of equal or greater database

versions. The database version is indicated by the second digit in the firmware release number.

Example: GPRO.2.1.0.7432, where the second digit is 1. If the database version is less than

the current firmware this option is not valid and current configuration will not be present after

reboot.

o Use Standby – Use configuration in the standby partition after swap and reboot

o Reset to Default – Reset configuration values to default after swap and reboot

Page 234: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

7-2

Note the following:

Always check the Swap and Reboot when performing a firmware upgrade.

If the Upgrade option is checked without the Swap & Reboot checked, only the Standby

version will be updated.

If the reboot box is checked the Interface Unit will automatically reboot at the end of the

upgrade.

WARNING: Damage may occur

Do Not power off PC or Chassis while Upgrade is running.

7.2 The HPS/RFL GARD Pro system Upgrade Tool Installation

7.2.1 System Firmware Updater Tool Setup

1. To "install" the GARD Updater, simply double click the “UpgradeGARD” setup file.

Page 235: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

7-3

2. Click Next to continue.

3. Click Next to install to the default folder or Browse to select a different folder.

Page 236: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

7-4

4. Select “Finish” to complete the installation

Page 237: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

7-5

7.3 The HPS/RFL GARD Pro system Firmware Upgrade Procedure

Upgrade Procedure

Note: Before starting the upgrade follow the Gard Upgrade Tool installation.

1. Double Click the shortcut on the desktop

2. The IP address is preset to 192.168.1.1 to match the front port of the chassis.

3. Open a Browser window to log into the front port of the chassis 192.168.1.1

Page 238: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

7-6

4. Enable SCP (for field upgrades) to allow a connection to the front port of the Chassis and

save the changes

5. Make note of the current Controller firmware (Release and Build) in the System

Management/Inventory for later comparison after the upgrade process completes.

Page 239: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

7-7

6. Click the Green refresh arrows and the connection state should change from N/A to “OK”

7. Use the Browse button to locate the version Zip file to be used for Upgrade.

8. Select the firmware image Zip file to be used for Upgrade.

Page 240: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

7-8

9. Once the file is selected, click the “GARD Upgrade” button to upload the .zip file to the

HPS/RFL GARD Pro system.

10. Wait for reboot. When complete, the progress bar will read 100% complete and reboot

automatically.

Note:

The Reboot Process takes approximately 2 minutes to complete and the error below will appear

when communication is lost.

Page 241: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

7-9

11. Log back into the HPS/RFL GARD Pro system after the reboot is complete.

12. Finally, verify the firmware upgrade was successful in the System Management/Inventory

page by comparing the Controller information (Release and Build) with the Release and

Build noted previously.

Page 242: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Power Line Carrier

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

7-10

This page intentionally

left blank

Page 243: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Technical Data/Specifications

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

8-1

Technical Data/Specifications Section 8.

As of the date this Instruction Manual was published, the following specifications apply to the

HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ system. Because all of HPS/RFL products undergo constant

refinement and improvement, these specifications are subject to change without notice.

8.1 System Specifications

Temperature:

Operating: -20°C to +70°C (-4°F to 158°F)

Storage: -40°C to +85°C (-40°F to 185°F)

Relative Humidity:

Up to 95% at +40°C(+104°F)

8.1.1 Inputs and Outputs

The HPS/RFL GARD Pro system can be configured with up to 20 input and output slots

available on the rear part of the chassis. Relay outputs are jumper selectable Form A or Form

B, and in addition each input and output has an inverter and a timer associated with it that has

settings for both pick-up (de-bounce) delay and drop-out (pulse-stretch) delay.

Optically Isolated Inputs:

Quantity: Six per module.

Jumper selectable Input Voltage: 24/48/125/250Vdc

Rating No Operation Operates Max. Input Voltage

24V <14V >19V 36V

48V <28V >38V 68V

125V <70V >95V 150V

250V <140V >189V 300V

Input Current: Minimum 1.5mA

Minimum Pulse Width 0.03ms, additional de-bounce time set with logic

timer settings.

Solid-State Outputs:

Quantity: Six per module.

Output Current: Max. 1A continuous, 2A for 1 minute, or 10A for

100msec.

Open-Circuit Voltage: 300Vdc max.

Pick-up Time: <1msec.

Continued…..

Page 244: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Technical Data/Specifications

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

8-2

Relay Outputs:

Quantity: Six per module.

Relay Pick-up Time: 4msec.

Output Current Rating: 6A continuous

Surge: 30A for 200msec.

AlarmRelays:

Quantity: Two

Contacts: SPDT (Form C)

Rating: 100mA, 300Vdc resistive load

Page 245: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Technical Data/Specifications

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

8-3

8.1.2 The HPS/RFL GARD Pro System Power Supply Specifications

Table 8-1 The HPS/RFL GARD Pro System Power Supply Specifications

Specifications

Power Supply Part Number

500305

500315

500325

Input Voltage Range:

48-125Vdc or 120Vac 200-300Vdc or 220Vac 19-29Vdc

Max Output Current:

+18V -18V

4.00 Amps (combined total)

4.00 Amps (combined total)

4.00 Amps (combined total)

Adjustments:

none

none none

Test Points: TP1 TP2 TP3

+18 Volts nominal

Common -18 Volts nominal

+18 Volts nominal

Common -18 Volts nominal

+18 Volts nominal

Common -18 Volts nominal

Indicators:

DS1 – Normal (Green)

DS1 – Normal (Green) DS1 – Normal (Green)

Fuses: (2) Manufactured Prior to March 2016

4A, 250 V SLO-BLO (3AG ¼ x 1¼)

2A, 250 V SLO-BLO (3AG ¼ x 1¼)

10A, 32 V SLO-BLO

(3AG ¼ x 1¼)

Manufactured after March 2016

4A, 250 V SLO-BLO (5mm x 20mm)

2A, 250 V SLO-BLO (5mm x 20mm)

10A, 32 V SLO-BLO (5mm x 20mm)

Operating Temperature:

-20oC to +70

oC -20

oC to +70

oC -20

oC to +70

oC

Humidity:

95% @ +40oC

95% @ +40

oC

95% @ +40

oC

Isolation:

2500 Vdc isolation from input terminals to ground, and input terminals to output terminals.

2500 Vdc isolation from input terminals to ground, and input terminals to output terminals.

2500 Vdc isolation from input terminals to ground, and input terminals to output terminals.

RFI Susceptibility:

ANSI PC37.90.2 (35 Volts/Meter)

IEC 255-22-3 (RFI Class III)

Interface Dielectric Strength:

All contact inputs, solid-state outputs, power supply inputs and relay outputs meet the following

specifications:

ANSI C37.90-1989 (Dielectric)

ANSI C37.90.1-1989 (SWC and Fast Transient))

EN 60255-5 (1500Vrms Breakdown Voltage and Impulse Withstand)

EN 60255-22-1 (SWC Class III)

Page 246: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Technical Data/Specifications

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

8-4

EN60255-22-2 (ESD Class III)

EN60255-22-4 (Fast-Transient Class III)

EN60834-1

8.2 Optional Modules

8.2.1 Power Line Carrier Specifications

Modes of Operation: FSK (2F or 3F), On/Off

Number of Active Channels:

3RU One

6RU One to Four

Operating Band: 30Hz to 30kHz

Channel Tuning Resolution: 125Hz

Maximum Transmit Power: 10W

Transmit Output Impedance: 50Ω (75Ω Skewed Hybrid Available)

Maximum Transmitter Accuracy: ±10Hz

Maximum Level of Spurious Emissions: -55dBc

Maximum Receive Input Level: 25Vrms (+41dBm @ 50Ω)

Receive Dynamic Range: >40dB

Maximum Receive Sensitivity: 5mVrms (-33dBm @ 50Ω)

Operating Temperature -20ºC to +70ºC (-4ºF to +158ºF)

Receive Input Impedance:

Terminated 50 - 75Ω selectable

Un-terminated >30k Ω

Insertion Loss (Skewed Hybrid):

Transmit : 0.5dB (nominal)

Receive: -13dB (nominal)

Frequency Response (Output Filter): ±0.5dB over selected frequency band

8.2.2 50W 9508 RF Chassis Specifications (Option)

8.2.2.1 50W Power Amplifier

Number of Inputs: One or two

Input Level: +4dBm @ 75Ω – single input

+1dBm @ 75Ω – two inputs

Input Impedance: 75Ω nominal

Frequency Response: Flat within ±2.0dB from 20kHz to 500kHz

Maximum Output: 50W PEP

Page 247: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Technical Data/Specifications

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

8-5

Output Impedance: 50Ω nominal

Input Power: +92Vdc @ 2.0A

+30Vdc @ 0.2A

Operating Temperature: -20ºC to +65ºC (-4ºF to +149ºF)

Dimensions:

Height: 5.25in (13.3cm)

Width: 17.625in (44.7cm) with mounting ears 19in (48.2cm)

Depth: 19.5in (49.5cm)

8.2.2.2 Power Amplifier, Power Supply

Input Voltage Range:

Part No. 107250-4: 38Vdc to 150Vdc

Part No. 107250-5: 200Vdc to 300Vdc

Output Power: 30Vdc @ 0.25A

92Vdc @ 2.4A

Operating Temperature: -20ºC to +65ºC (-4ºF to +149ºF)

Humidity: +95% @ +40ºC

Isolation: 2500Vdc isolation from input terminal to ground, output

terminals to ground, input terminals to output terminals,

relay terminals to ground, and relay contacts to coil.

8.2.2.3 Line Board

Power Capability: 100W maximum

Frequency Range:

Part No. 103090: 20 to 500kHz

Impedance:

Transmit Input: 50Ω

Receive Output: 50Ω

Line: Adjustable to 50, 75, 100, or 130Ω

Continued………..

Insertion Loss

Transmit : 0.5dB Maximum

Receive: 14dB typical

Input Power Requirements None; passive components only (no active components)

Operating Temperature: -20ºC to +65ºC (-4ºF to +149ºF)

Page 248: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Technical Data/Specifications

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

8-6

8.3 DNP3 Device Profile Document

DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT Vendor Name: Hubbell Power Systems

Device Name: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ system

Highest DNP Level Supported: Device Function:

For Requests Level 3 Master Slave

For Responses Level 3

Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP Levels Supported (the complete list is described in the attached table):

None

Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets): Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets)

Transmitted 292 Transmitted 2048 (if >2048, must be configurable)

Received (must be 292) 292 Received 2048 (must be > 249)

Maximum Data Link Re-tries: Maximum Application Layer Re-tries:

None None

Fixed at _______________________ Configurable, range ____ to _______

Configurable, range ____ to _______ (Fixed is not permitted)

Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation:

Never

Always

Sometimes If 'Sometimes', when?

Configurable If 'Configurable', how?

Requires Application Layer Confirmation:

Never

Always (not recommended)

When reporting Event Data (Slave devices only)

When sending multi-fragment responses (Slave devices only)

Sometimes If 'Sometimes', when?

Configurable If 'Configurable', how?

Page 249: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Technical Data/Specifications

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

8-7

Timeouts while waiting for:

Data Link Confirm None Fixed at Variable Configurable

Complete Appl. Fragment None Fixed at Variable Configurable

Application Confirm None Fixed at 5000 ms Variable Configurable

Complete Appl. Response None Fixed at Variable Configurable

Others_____________________________________

Attach explanation if 'Variable' or 'Configurable' was checked for any timeout

Sends/Executes Control Operations:

WRITE Binary Outputs Never Always Sometimes Configurable

SELECT/OPERATE Never Always Sometimes Configurable

DIRECT OPERATE Never Always Sometimes Configurable

DIRECT OPERATE - NO ACK Never Always Sometimes Configurable

Count > 1 Never Always Sometimes Configurable

Pulse On Never Always Sometimes Configurable

Pulse Off Never Always Sometimes Configurable

Latch On Never Always Sometimes Configurable

Latch Off Never Always Sometimes Configurable

Queue Never Always Sometimes Configurable

Clear Queue Never Always Sometimes Configurable

Attach explanation if 'Sometimes' or 'Configurable' was checked for any operation

.FILL OUT THE FOLLOWING ITEMS FOR SLAVE DEVICES ONLY:

Reports Binary Input Change Events when no specific variation requested:

Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change Events when no specific variation requested:

Never Never

Only time-tagged (SOE Triggered only) Binary Input Change With Time (SOE

Triggered only)

Only non-time-tagged (HMI outputs) Binary Input Change With Relative Time

Configurable to send both, one or the other

(attach explanation) Configurable (attach explanation)

Sends Unsolicited Responses: Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses:

Never Never

Configurable (attach explanation) When Device Restarts

Only certain objects When Status Flags Change

Sometimes (attach explanation) No other options are permitted

ENABLE/DISABLE UNSOLICITED

Function codes supported

Page 250: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Technical Data/Specifications

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

8-8

Default Counter Object/Variation: Counters Roll Over at:

No Counters Reported No Counters Reported

Configurable (attach explanation) Configurable (attach explanation)

Default Object 20 16 Bits

Default Variation 1 32 Bits (SOE Counters)

Point-by-point list attached Other Value _8 bits__ (Only for PLC module counters)

Point-by-point list attached

Sends Multi-Fragment Responses: Yes No

This document must be accompanied by a table having the following headings:

Object Group Request Function Codes Response Function Codes

Object Variation Request Qualifiers Response Qualifiers

Object Name (optional)

See the HPS/RFL GARD Pro System Instruction Manual, section 4.16.1.1

8.4 Disposal

When disposing of the equipment, it should be done in strict accordance with all local and

national regulations for the disposal of electrical and electronic equipment. The printed circuit

boards should be separated for recycling.

Page 251: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Index

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

9-1

Index Section 9.

9.1 Index

9

9508 RF Chassis · 5-49

50W Power Amp · 5-52

50W Power Amp Circuit Board · 5-54

9508 RF Chassis Block Diagram · 5-52

Additional 50W Module in 100W Systems · 5-53

Attenuator Board · 5-69

Settings · 5-69

Balance Board and External Amp Connection Board ·

5-62

Chassis · 5-51

Line Board · 5-64

Setting Jumpers · 5-66

Motherboard · 5-70

Rear Panel Connector Assignments · 5-70

Power Amp Board Jumpers · 5-55

Power Amp Power supply · 5-57

Quick Tuning and Jumper Setting Overview · 5-71

Rear Panel Wiring – HPS/RFL GARD Pro System

with 50W · 5-73

Rear Panel Wiring for the HPS/RFL GARD Pro

System PLC with 100W Applications · 5-74

RX Connection board · 5-68

RX Filter · 5-67

Tuning

RX Filter · 5-68

TX Filter · 5-58

TX Filter Jumpers · 5-58

TX Tuning Procedure · 5-60

A

Access Levels · 4-7

Alarm and Alert Relay Connections · 3-10

Alarm Relay and Input Power Connections · 3-9

Alarm States (Color) · 4-7

Alarms - System · 4-39

Configuration · 4-41

Status · 4-39

B

Boot-Up Sequence · 3-20

C

Carrier Level Indicator · 5-9

Loads · 5-47 Chassis Ground · 3-11

Chassis Grounding · 1-1

CLI Meter Tuning · 5-47

CLI Settings · 5-46

Commissioning and Verification

Calibrations through the User Interface · 5-36

Hybrid Tuning Procedure · 5-39

Rear Module Adjustments · 5-37

Transmit Fail Adjustment · 5-39

Verifying /Adjusting the Transmit Output Power · 5-39

Verifying/Adjusting Amplifier Impedance · 5-38 Configuration

FSK, Advanced · 5-13

FSK, General · 5-11

Logic · 4-49

Logic Timers · 4-50

On-Off, Advanced · 5-24

On-Off, Checkback · 5-27

On-Off, General · 5-22

On-Off, Hard Carrier · 5-30

CONTROLLER CARD BACKGROUND COLOR · 2-13

Current Limiter Option · 3-19

D

DNP3 Device Profile Document · 8-6

Dynamic Menu Feature · 4-20

E

Earth Stud - Location · 1-1

Effectivity · 11

External Labels · 1-4

F

File Operations · 4-11

Page 252: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Index

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

9-2

Saving Files to a PC · 4-13

Sending files to the RFL™ GARD Pro™ System · 4-

11

Front Panel Indicators · 2-9

FTP Server · 4-15

Function Buttons (PLC) · 5-15

G

GUI · 2-10

H

HPS/RFL GARD Pro System Dashboard · 4-6

I

Input Power Connections · 3-11

Input Unit - Setting Jumpers · 4-23

Input/Output Module · 2-6, 4-21

Input/Output Modules

Input - Test · 4-29

Input Advanced Configuration · 4-28

Input Mapping · 4-27

Output - Advanced Configuration · 4-33

Output - Test · 4-34

Output Mapping · 4-32

Status · 4-24 Installation · 3-1

Interconnected Chassis - Installed in Rack or Cabinet ·

3-4

Interconnected Chassis - Mounted on Shipping Rails ·

3-4

Mounting · 3-2

Individual Chassis · 3-2

Mounting Dimensions · 3-3

Unpacking · 3-1

Individual Chassis · 3-1

Interconnected Chassis · 3-1 Inventory and Version Info · 4-19

Inventory Info · 4-19

IRIG-B through rear RS-232 port · 3-15

L

LEDs Front Panel · 4-36

Configuration · 4-37

Status · 4-36

N

Network Application · 2-9

O

Ordering Information · 12

P

Part Numbers

Analog Module Assembly · 5-44, 5-45

PLC

FSK · 5-1

FSK - Min. Channel Spacing · 5-3

Function · 5-1

On/Off Block - Transport Delay and Channel Spacing ·

5-5

On/Off Operation · 5-4

Trip Transport Delay and Channel Spacing · 5-2 PLC Calibration

TX Level Calibration · 5-34 PLC Module · 5-9

Power Supply Specifications · 8-3

R

Rear Connections

Analog PLC Module · 5-7

Second PLC Module · 5-77 Receiver Operating Range and Dynamic Range · 5-34

Relay Output Unit - Setting Jumpers · 4-24

Revision Record · 11

RF Chassis Specifications · 8-4

RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Slot Location and Module Description · 2-3

S

Safety Instructions · 1-1

Safety Summery · 1-1 Second PLC Module - Jumper Settings · 5-78

Settings - General Information · 4-21

Settings Recommended

Checkback – 2-Terminal · 5-28

Checkback – 3-Terminal · 5-29

Hard Carrier – 2-Terminal · 5-31

Hard Carrier – 3-Terminal · 5-32

PLC FSK · 5-16

PLC On-Off · 5-25 Single On-Off Switch · 5-75

Slot Locations (3U) · 2-3

Slot Locations (6U) · 2-4

SOE · 4-43

Record Details · 4-44

Retrieving · 4-43

SOEs

Configuration · 4-48

Record Details (Logic Bits) · 4-45 Status

Page 253: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Index

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

9-3

FSK · 5-9

On-Off · 5-20 Supplied Drawings · 2-2

Switched Battery Power Supply · 5-75

System Configuration · 4-1

Connecting a Laptop and setting IP Addresses · 4-1 System Description

Key Features · 2-1

System Modules and Options Listing · 2-2

System Settings · 4-51

Clock · 4-52

System Specifications · 8-1

T

Table of Contents · 3

Technical Data - Specifications · 8-1

PLC · 8-4 Test

FSK · 5-18

On-Off · 5-33 Transmit Carrier Frequency Range · 5-43

Troubleshooting · 6-1

Connectivity Issues · 6-1

Module Level Alarms

PLC Digital Module · 6-3

PLC Board Analog · 6-8

PLC Board Digital · 6-5

PLC Issues · 6-4 TSD · 2-15

PUSH BUTTON INTERFACE · 4-58

SCREEN DISPLAY · 4-56

SCREEN INITIALIZATION · 2-17

Screen Orientation · 2-16 TX Carrier Frequency - Jumper Settings · 5-44, 5-45

U

User Administration · 4-7

Access Control · 4-9

Access Log · 4-10

V

Ventilation · 3-4

Page 254: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Index

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

9-4

This page intentionally

left blank

Page 255: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

Index

RF-MCDGARDPRO Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

10-5

Application Notes Section 10.

This section contains application notes, which are intended to assist the user in configuring their

HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ system.

Currently there are no Application Notes for this product.

Page 256: HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual - Rfl … · 2018. 4. 30. · HPS/RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Instruction Manual Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 353 Powerville Road Boonton

RFL™ GARD Pro™ System Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products

March 30, 2018 (c)2018 Hubbell Incorporated

Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. – RFL™ Products 353 Powerville Road Boonton Twp., NJ 07005-9151 USA Tel: 973.334.3100 Fax: 973.334.3863 Email: [email protected] www.rflelect.com